Design of 43 MW Hydroelectric Power Plant in Oriental Mindoro

TECHNOLOGICAL INSTITUTE OF THE PHILIPPINES
938 Aurora Blvd., Cubao, Quezon City
College of Engineering and Architecture

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT
DESIGN OF 43 MW HYDRO-ELECTRIC POWER PLANT

IN ORIENTAL, MINDORO
This Design is presented to the Mechanical Engineering Department

In Partial Fulfilment for the Degree of
Bachelor of Science in Mechanical Engineering
Designed by:
Du, Edchelle D. M.
Fortez, John Peter F.
Limpahan, Boris Lorenzo P.
Maximo, David Martin J.
Muñoz, Jaige Christian D.
POWER PLANT DESIGN

ME 511- ME52FB1
Submitted to:
Engr. Rodrigo M. Garcia, PME

Faculty/Professor
MARCH 2018
APPROVAL SHEET
This design entitled Design of 43 MW Hydro-Electric Power Plant in Oriental Mindoro,

prepared by Du, Edchelle D. M., Fortez, Peter John F., Limpahan, Boris Lorenzo P., Maximo,
David Martin J. and Muñoz, Jaige Christian D., in partial fulfillment of the requirements for the
degree of Bachelor of Science in Mechanical Engineering is hereby recommended for approval.
Approved by:
ENGR. RODRIGO M. GARCIA, PME

Power Plant Design Professor
Approved by the committee on oral examination on March 2018
Engr. Dennis John Mamon Engr. Luisito B. Tolentino

Adviser
Recommended for acceptance in fulfillment of the requirements for the degree of Bachelor
of Science in Mechanical Engineering is hereby recommended for approval.
ENGR. MANUEL E. MENDOZA, PME

Department Chair
Mechanical Engineering Department
Approved by:
DR. JESUSA N. PADILLA

Dean, College of Engineering and Architecture
ii
CERTIFICATION
This is to certify that the undersigned has reviewed and went through all the pages of the
project design entitled “Design of 43 MW Hydroelectric Power Plant in Oriental Mindoro”
developed by Edchelle D. M. Du, John Peter F. Fortez, Boris Lorenzo P. Limpahan, David
Martin J. Maximo, and Jaige Christian D. Muñoz, aligned with the set of structural rules that
govern the composition of sentences, phrases and words in English Language.
This project design is hereby proofread.
Signed:
MS. MARIZ F. DACULA

Grammarian/Proofreader
Date Signed:
MARCH 2018
iii
ABTRACT
The Design of 43 MW Hydroelectric Power Plant covers the very foundation from the
computation of components, to the aspects of comparison. This design focuses on three different
locations which the designers proposed. The planned site is situated in Oriental Mindoro where
there are experiences of rotational brown-out due to lack of power reserves. In addition, the
designers will discuss the different types of hydroelectric power plant but will specifically design a
reservoir-type hydroelectric power plant.
The design of hydroelectric power plant shall be based on location and its hours of
operation, for the average and peak demand use. The completion of the computation for design
needed will rise to the specifications of the components of the power plant which will be used for
choosing the actual specifications of the components. Additionally, the designers will also compute
for the estimated total cost of each designed hydroelectric power plant per location. From the
computations, the designers will use the results for trade-offs and sensitivity analysis for further
analyzing for choosing the best location for constructing the power plant.
Finalizing the design, the designers will show catalogues of each components that is
based from the calculated specifications and will recommend ideas and ways of making the design
more viable and accurate.
iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
APPROVAL SHEET ............................................................................................................................ii

C E R T I F I C A T I O N .................................................................................................................... iii
ABTRACT ...........................................................................................................................................iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS ..................................................................................................................... v
PREFACE......................................................................................................................................... viii
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT .....................................................................................................................ix
LIST OF TABLES ............................................................................................................................... x
LIST OF FIGURES ............................................................................................................................ xii
NOMENCLATURE ........................................................................................................................... xiv
CHAPTER 1 ....................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 The Project ............................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Statement of the Problem ........................................................................................................ 3
1.3 Project Objectives .................................................................................................................... 4
1.3.1 General Objectives ........................................................................................................... 4
1.3.2 Specific Objectives ........................................................................................................... 4
1.4 The Client ................................................................................................................................. 4
1.5 Project Scope and Limitations ................................................................................................. 7
1.6 Project Development ................................................................................................................ 8
CHAPTER 2 ..................................................................................................................................... 10
2.1 Proposed Power Generating Plant: Hydroelectric Power Plant............................................. 11
2.1.1 Background .................................................................................................................... 11
2.1.2 History............................................................................................................................. 11
2.1.3 Classification of Hydroelectric Power Plant .................................................................... 13
2.1.4 Advantages and Disadvantages of Hydroelectric Power Plant ...................................... 21
2.1.5 Hydroelectric Power Plant Layout .................................................................................. 23
2.1.6 Main Components .......................................................................................................... 24
2.1.7 Location .......................................................................................................................... 27
2.1.8 Rainfall Data ................................................................................................................... 35
2.1.9 Assumptions ................................................................................................................... 36
2.1.10 Formulas ....................................................................................................................... 40
CHAPTER 3 ..................................................................................................................................... 50
3.1 First Proposed Location ......................................................................................................... 51
3.1.1 Operational Hours per Day ............................................................................................. 61
v
3.2 Second Proposed Location .................................................................................................... 72
3.2.1 Operational Hours per Day ............................................................................................. 83
3.3 Third Proposed Location ........................................................................................................ 94
3.3.1 Operational Hours per Day ........................................................................................... 104
3.4 Summary of Chapter 3 Computations ................................................................................. 115
3.4.1 First Proposed Location................................................................................................ 115
3.4.2 Second Proposed Location .......................................................................................... 117
3.4.3 Third Proposed Location .............................................................................................. 118
CHAPTER 4 ................................................................................................................................... 120
4.1 DESIGN CONSTRAINTS .................................................................................................... 120
4.1.1 Economic (Total Cost) .................................................................................................. 120
4.1.2 Efficiency (Penstock Efficiency) ................................................................................... 138
4.1.3 Sustainability (Environmental Impact) .......................................................................... 138
4.2 Trade-Offs ............................................................................................................................ 139
4.2.1 Design Trade-off 1: Economical (Construction Cost) ................................................... 140
4.2.2 Design Trade-off 2: Efficiency (Penstock Efficiency) .................................................. 142
4.2.3 Design Trade-off 3: Sustainability (Environmental Impact) ......................................... 145
4.3 Sensitivity Analysis .............................................................................................................. 148
4.4 Design Standards ................................................................................................................ 151
CHAPTER 5 ................................................................................................................................... 198
5.1 Actual Specifications ............................................................................................................ 200
5.1.1 Penstock Actual Specifications .................................................................................... 200
5.1.2 Surge Tank Actual Specifications ................................................................................. 200
5.1.3 Water Dam Actual Specifications ................................................................................. 201
5.2 Component Catalogues ....................................................................................................... 202
5.2.1 Hydroelectric Turbine ................................................................................................... 202
5.2.2 Penstock ....................................................................................................................... 203
5.2.3 Surge Tank ................................................................................................................... 204
5.2.4 Sluice Gate ................................................................................................................... 205
5.2.5 Hydroelectric Generator ............................................................................................... 209
5.2.6 Transformer .................................................................................................................. 220
5.3 Conclusion ........................................................................................................................... 228
5.4 Recommendation ................................................................................................................. 228
REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................... 229
vi
APPENDICES ................................................................................................................................ 231
CURRICULUM VITAE .................................................................................................................... 243
RUBRICS ....................................................................................................................................... 253
vii
PREFACE
The conceptualization of this design project entitled, “Design of 43 MW Hydroelectric

Power Plant in Oriental Mindoro”, is a requirement for the subject “Power Plant Design” with
the course code of ME 511. This design project detailed every aspect of designing a hydroelectric
power plant. It includes the overview, computation, and deliberation of the designed project.
The designers chose this type of power plant because it utilizes a renewable source of
energy and can be used for base to peak load. The formulation of this design is based from the
shortages of power reserves specifically in Oriental Mindoro. Many reports and news cited the
shortages of power due to lack of power generating plants in Oriental Mindoro. Industries and
households are mainly affected by this situation. The government is trying every approach to
resolve this. For the designers, this design project will help the government and other clients to
plan intensively to provide a solution for this problem. In addition, the designers seek to improve
the supply of power of the whole nation, the Philippines, by building power plants that use
renewable sources of energy. As a consequence for using this type of energy, the carbon emission
of the country will decrease. The positive effects are the advantages of using this type of energy.
The designers seek to use the power of water to produce electricity through construction of dams
where the source of energy will be stored.
This design project has been constructed with the help of Engr. Rodrigo M. Garcia, PME
who willingly gave his ideas for the design of the power plant.
viii
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
We, the designers, want to express the utmost gratitude for the following people who
helped and guided us for the success of this design.
To Engr. Rodrigo M. Garcia, PME, our professor in Power Plant design, who taught us the
very foundation of designing a power plant from meticulous to the larger aspects and exchanging
his immense knowledge to us, the students. His expertise and guidance helped us in making this
design possible.
To Engr. Dennis John C. Mamon, our adviser for this design, for his readiness of
answering the queries regarding with this design. With his guidance and experience of designing
and for the estimation of cost, this design becomes possible.
To Dr. Jesusa N. Padilla, Dean of College of Engineering and Architecture, for guiding us
with the documentation of this design and also for taking in charge as a temporary chairman for the
Mechanical Engineering department. With her perseverance of guiding us through occasional
seminars, the documentation of the design is now aligned with the requirements of ABET.
To Ms. Mariz F. Dacula, an English teacher, who technically corrected and finalized the
grammar for this document. With her expertise, the technicality of the written-ups of this document
will not be possible.
To co-students, who are undertaking Power Plant design, for their readiness of helping
each other through queries and teaching their understanding. Without them, the designs and
projects of each would not be possible.
To our friends and families, who cares and motivate us for finishing this design. Their
unfailing love and support through sleepless nights help us in achieving the completion of the
design being well and healthy.
Lastly, to our Almighty God and Savior, Dearest Jesus, who gave us strength and courage
to finish this design. His guidance, knowledge and wisdom brought us to the conclusion. Through
Him, all things become possible. He never fails us through thick and thin. We owe a lot to You, our
God.
Thank you and God bless.
- The Designers
ix
LIST OF TABLES
Table 2-1: Classification of Hydroelectric Power Plant based on Available Head ........................... 18
Table 2-2: Hydroelectric Power Plant Layout Parts ......................................................................... 23
Table 2-3: Rainfall Data of 2015 and 2016 ...................................................................................... 35
Table 2-4: Assumptions of the Whole Design .................................................................................. 36
Table 2-5: Assumptions based on the First Proposed Location ...................................................... 36
Table 2-6: Assumptions based on the Second Proposed Location ................................................. 37
Table 2-7: Assumptions based on the Third Proposed Location ..................................................... 38
Table 3-1: First Location Calculation Summary ............................................................................... 60
Table 3-2: Values for Penstock Design ............................................................................................ 63
Table 3-3: Surge Tank Design Given Values ................................................................................... 66
Table 3-4 Water Dam Surge Tank Design Given Values ................................................................ 69
Table 3-5: Second Proposed Location Calculations Summary ........................................................ 82
Table 3-6: Values for Penstock Design ............................................................................................ 85
Table 3-7 Surge Tank Design Values .............................................................................................. 87
Table 3-8 Water Dam Surge Tank Design ....................................................................................... 90
Table 3-9: Third Location Calculations Summary .......................................................................... 103
Table 3-10: Values for Penstock Design ........................................................................................ 106
Table 3-11: Surge Tank Design Given Values ............................................................................... 109
Table 3-12: Water Dam Surge Tank Design .................................................................................. 112
Table 3-13: Values for Specification of the Hydroelectric Power Plant .......................................... 115
Table 3-14: Computed Penstock Specifications ............................................................................ 116
Table 3-15: Computed Surge Tank Specifications......................................................................... 116
Table 3-16: Water Dam Specifications ........................................................................................... 116
Table 4-1: Summary of Cost Analysis ............................................................................................ 136
Table 4-2: Summary of Initial Estimated Values ............................................................................ 139
Table 4-3: Summary of Initial Estimated Costs for Economic Constraints..................................... 140
Table 4-4: Summary of Final Values with Criterion’s Importance for Economic Constraints ........ 142
Table 4-5: Summary of Initial Calculated Efficiencies for Efficiency Constraints ........................... 142
Table 4-6: Summary of Final Values with Criterion’s Importance for Efficiency Constraints ......... 145
Table 4-7: Summary of Initial Estimated Values for Sustainability Constraints ............................. 145
Table 4-8: Summary of Final Values with Criterion’s Importance for Sustainability Constraints ... 147
Table 4-9: Designers Raw Ranking for the Three Designs ............................................................ 147
Table 4-10: Scores from the Computation of Ranking for each design ......................................... 148
Table 4-11: Interchanged Values of Importance of Constraints set by the designers ................... 148
Table 4-12: Results for Repeated Computation of Raw Rankings ................................................ 149
Table 5-1: Values for Specification of the Hydroelectric Power Plant ............................................ 198
Table 5-2: Computed Penstock Specifications .............................................................................. 198
x
Table 5-3: Computed Surge Tank Specifications........................................................................... 199
Table 5-4: Water Dam Specifications ............................................................................................. 199
Table 5-5: Computed Penstock Specifications .............................................................................. 200
Table 5-6: Computed Surge Tank Specifications........................................................................... 200
Table 5-7: Water Dam Specifications ............................................................................................. 201
Table 5-8: Factors of Safety ........................................................................................................... 241
xi
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1-1: Historical kWh Energy and Peak Demand of Oriental Mindoro ....................................... 2
Figure 1-2: ORMECO Official Logo .................................................................................................... 4
Figure 1-3: ORMECO Profile.............................................................................................................. 5
Figure 1-4: ORMECO Technical Information ..................................................................................... 5
Figure 1-5: ORMECO Rates for Residential Customer as of November 2014 .................................. 6
Figure 1-6: Project Development Process ......................................................................................... 8
Figure 2-1(a): Typical Layout of Run-off River Plant ........................................................................ 14
Figure 2-1(b): Chief Joseph Dam near Bridgeport, Washington, USA ............................................ 14
Figure 2-2: Hugh Keenleyside Dam operated by BC Hydro, and the Arrow Lakes Generating
Station .............................................................................................................................................. 15
Figure 2-3(a): Reservoir Hydroelectric Power Plant......................................................................... 16
Figure 2-3(b): Adam Beck Hydroelectric Generating Stations ......................................................... 16
Figure 2-4: Principle of a Pumped Storage Power Plant ................................................................. 17
Figure 2-5: Low Head (canal type) Power Plant .............................................................................. 18
Figure 2-6: Medium Head Plant ....................................................................................................... 19
Figure 2-7: High Head Plant ............................................................................................................. 20
Figure 2-8: Hydroelectric Power Plant Layout.................................................................................. 23
Figure 2-9: Flow Sheet of Hydroelectric Power Plant ...................................................................... 24
Figure 2-10: Topographical Map of the Area near the Bongabong River ........................................ 27
Figure 2-11: Terrain Map through Color Ranges of the 1st Prospect Location ................................ 28
Figure2-12: Satellite View of the 1st Prospect Area ......................................................................... 28
Figure 2-13: Three-Dimensional View of the 1st Prospect Area ....................................................... 29
Figure 2-14: Topographical Map of the 2nd Prospect Location near a Body of Water ..................... 30
Figure 2-15: Terrain Map through Color Ranges of the 2nd Prospect Location ............................... 30
Figure 2-16: Satellite View of the 2nd Prospect Area........................................................................ 31
Figure 2-17: Three-Dimensional View of the 2nd Prospect Area ...................................................... 31
Figure 2-18: Topographical Map of the 3rd Prospect Location at Caagutayan. San Teodoro,
Oriental Mindoro ............................................................................................................................... 32
Figure 2-19: Terrain Map Through Color Ranges of 3rd Prospect Location ..................................... 33
Figure 2-20: Satellite View of the 3rd Prospect Area ........................................................................ 33
Figure 2-21: Three-Dimensional View of the 3rd Prospect Area ...................................................... 34
Figure 2-22: First Proposed Location Estimated Shaded Area........................................................ 37
Figure 2-23: Second Proposed Location Estimated Shaded Area .................................................. 38
Figure 2-24: Third Proposed Location Estimated Shaded Area ...................................................... 39
Figure 2-25: Relative Triangle .......................................................................................................... 44
Figure 2-26: Centroidal Pressure in the Surge Tank........................................................................ 46
Figure 2-27: Isometric View of Water Dam ...................................................................................... 47
Figure 2-28: Side View of Dam ........................................................................................................ 47
Figure 2-29: Dimensions and Relations between Water and Dam .................................................. 48
Figure 3-1: Graphical Representation of Flow Rate per Day and Average Flow Rate in First
Proposed Location............................................................................................................................ 60
Figure 3-2: Graphical Representation of the Flow Rate per Day and Average Flow rate in Second
Proposed Location............................................................................................................................ 82
Figure 3-3: Graphical Representation of the Flow Rate per Day and Average Flow Rate in Third
Proposed Location.......................................................................................................................... 103
xii
Figure 4-1: Cost Analysis per Location .......................................................................................... 137
Figure 4-2: Ranking Scale for Percent Difference.......................................................................... 140
Figure 4-3: Percent Difference of Design 1 and Design 3 for Economic Constraint ...................... 141
Figure 3-4: Percent Difference of Design 1 and Design 2 for Economic Constraint ...................... 142
Figure 4-5: Percent Difference of Design 2 and Design 1 for Efficiency Constraint ...................... 143
Figure 4-6: Percent Difference of Design 2 and Design 3 for Efficiency Constraint ...................... 144
Figure 4-7: Percent Difference of Design 3 and Design 1 for Sustainability Constraint ................ 146
Figure 4-8: Percent Difference of Design 2 and Design 3 for Sustainability Constraint ................ 147
Figure 4-9: Column Graph Representation of Sensitivity Analysis ................................................ 150
Figure 5-1: Working Areas of Different Turbine Types................................................................... 202
Figure 5-2: GE Francis Turbine Catalogue .................................................................................... 203
Figure 5-3: Standard Gauge for Sheet and Plate Iron and Steel ................................................... 203
Figure 5-4: Standard Gauge for Sheet and Plate Iron and Steel ................................................... 204
xiii
NOMENCLATURE
Abbreviation Meaning
ηg Generator efficiency
n Number of Year
VWSA Water Volume at Shaded Area
VWD Water Volume in Dam
Q Volume Flow Rate of Water
Pt Turbine Power
ηp Penstock Efficiency
Vt ’ Velocity of Water
HN Ideal Net Head
Hf Head due to Friction
ϴ Degree of Inclination
tp Thickness of Penstock
Sd Design Yield Strength
Lp Length of Penstock
f Coefficient of Friction
H1 Gross Head
H2 Height of the Turbine to the Ground
Dp Penstock Diameter
γ Specific Weight of Water
HN’ Actual Net Head
PO Power Output
Pw Pressure of Water in the Turbine
F.S. Factor of Safety
Lf Length due to Friction
Vwp Volume of Water after Surge Tank
VST Volume of Surge Tank
DST Diameter of Surge Tank
HST Height of Surge Tank
Pb Hydrostatic Pressure at the Bottom of Surge Tank
Pc Centroidal Pressure in the Surge Tank
TST Thickness of Surge Tank
WD Weight of dam
W1 Width of Dam at the Bottom
W2 Width of Dam on Top
HD Height of Dam
LD Length of Dam
ρc Density of Concrete
Pw Weight of Water in Dam
Aw Area of Triangle formed in Water adjacent to Dam
Wt Total Weight of Dam
F.S.S. Factor of Safety due to Sinking
Sb Soil Bearing Pressure
xiv
Ab Bottom Area
F.S.O. Factor of Safety due to Overturning
PH Hydrostatic Pressure in Dam
F.S.L.D. Factor of Safety due to Sliding
μ Coefficient of Friction in Dam
Vd Volume of Dam
Nb Number of Bag per Cubic Yard
Nbt Total Number of Bags
Vw Volume of Water Needed
Vsand Volume of Sand Needed
Vgravel Volume of Gravel Needed
CostDC Dam Construction Material Cost
Vrst Total Volume of Reinforcement Steel Bars
Vrs Volume of Reinforced Steel Bars
Nrst Number of Reinforced Steel Bars
PD Hydrostatic Pressure acting on Dam
Costrst Cost of Reinforced Steel Bars
Costmc Total Material Cost
Costph Cost of Powerhouse Equipment
Costmp Manpower Cost
EMMR Equivalent Monthly Minimum Wage Rate
Costinst Installation Cost
Costsp Site Identification and Preliminary Assessment
Costto Transport and Other Cost
i Interest
ADR Applicable Daily Rate
CostDEP Design, Engineering nad Project Management Cost
CostT Total Cost
xv
1 Chapter 1: Design of 43 MW Hydroelectric Power Plant in Oriental Mindoro
CHAPTER 1
PROJECT BACKGROUND
Electricity is a very crucial denominator for the everyday lives of people. It contributes
greatly to societal evolution. It can be stated that electricity is a major necessity because almost
every modern devices and equipment utilizes it. Most industrial and household operations will
suffer great damages in the event that an electrical supply is cut-off due to unforeseen
circumstances. Nowadays, technological advancements can be seen throughout the country and
the demand for electricity grows accordingly. One can see the occasional brown-outs and black-
outs especially on urban areas. Moreover, news shows that there is an increasing demand in
power and the grids are barely sufficient to supply electricity. Power plants are industrial stations
that generate electric power. The generated power will be distributed through electric distribution
systems to bring power for every residential, commercial, and industrial areas.
In the Philippines, the electric consumption has continued to increase with each
succeeding year. As of the year 2016, there is a significant increase of electricity consumption at
10%, and peak demand at 8.7%. Additionally, the electric consumption of 2015 to 2016 grew from
82,413,213 Megawatt-hour (MWh) to 90,797,891 MWh. The residential sector, together with the
industrial sector comprised more than half of the total Philippine electricity consumption. The
Department of Energy (DOE) expects that the peak demand for electricity will grow more than
triple-fold by 2040. With all these data, it is evident that the Philippines need more power
generating plants. Also, the location of the country is a hotspot and an eco-diverse area at that. By
utilizing the countries resources, problems like power interruption can be permanently eradicated.
This will reduce the harmful effects towards the environment. The designers must take into action
the different aspects and factors governing the building of a power generating plant.
1.1 The Project
Here in the Philippines, the demand for power is gradually increasing. To meet this rapid
growth in the demand for power and supply power, a rapid development of power generating
facilities is necessary. In developing such power generating facilities, it is necessary to develop
power generating facilities using various power resources such as Hydro-electric power generation.
In consideration with emerging problems represented by the fact that the availability of
power resources and locations for hydropower generation are limited. However, it is important to
develop a well-balanced portfolio of various power resources with low generating cost. Regarding
hydropower generation, there are issues in developing large-scale hydropower generating facilities
such as long development periods, and the magnitude of environmental and social impact
depending on the location of development.
Hydro-electric power generation, is the designers’ choice in the selection process of the
most suitable kind of power generating plant to address the problem present on the corresponding
1|Page
area. Engineering approach is being considered by the designers to solve the problem with the
outcome that possesses Economical, Sustainability, and Environmental factor.
Hydro-electric power plant will be a reservoir-type. There will be a dam which is suitable for
water distribution to the residents of the area and this dam will place the turbine and power house
for power generation. The construction of dam and its dimensions will be based on the selected
location, the topography of the area, and the intended output of power. The designers seek to
produce a hydroelectric power plant based on the average and peak demand. From this output
power, the designers can derive the dimension needed by the water dam and the selection of
needed components that will be constructed. The selection should be equal to or greater than the
computed values which will be presented in Chapter 3 and 5 for compensation and allowance.
From the document of Energy Regulatory Commission in the matter of the application for
the approval of the addendum and second addendum to the electricity supply agreement (ESA)
between Oriental Mindoro Electric Cooperative, Inc. (ORMECO) and Power One Corporation
(Power One) ERC Case No. 2014-003 RC, the historical kWh energy and peak demand from 2004
to 2012 is shown in figure below.
Figure 1-1: Historical kWh Energy and Peak Demand of Oriental Mindoro
(Source: Application for the approval of the project of the electricity supply agreement between
ORMECO and Power One, ERC Case no. 2014-003 RC)
Additionally, from the document, ORMECO’s energy demand as of 2013 is 188,318,000

kWh while its peak demand is 35 MW. Solving for the average energy demand,
1 𝑑𝑎𝑦 1 𝑦𝑒𝑎𝑟
𝐴𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝐸𝑛𝑒𝑟𝑔𝑦 𝐷𝑒𝑚𝑎𝑛𝑑 = 188,318 𝑀𝑊ℎ × ×
24 ℎ𝑟𝑠 365 𝑑𝑎𝑦𝑠
= 21.50 𝑀𝑊 ≈ 22 𝑀𝑊
ORMECO forecast an energy demand which is based on an average minimal increase in

power consumption ranging from 4% to 7% per year (Source: Oriental Mindoro Power
Development Program). The designers will use 4% as the annual increase rate. From this datum,
the designers could forecast the average energy demand for the year 2018.
2|Page
2018 𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑎𝑠𝑡 𝐴𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝐸𝑛𝑒𝑟𝑔𝑦 𝐷𝑒𝑚𝑎𝑛𝑑 = 22 𝑀𝑊 (1 + 𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒)𝑛
Where:
n = Number of Year
𝑛 = 2018 − 2013
𝑛 = 5 𝑦𝑒𝑎𝑟𝑠
Substituting this value to the equation,
2018 𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑎𝑠𝑡 𝐴𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝐸𝑛𝑒𝑟𝑔𝑦 𝐷𝑒𝑚𝑎𝑛𝑑 = 22 𝑀𝑊 (1 + 0.04)5
2018 𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑎𝑠𝑡 𝐴𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝐸𝑛𝑒𝑟𝑔𝑦 𝐷𝑒𝑚𝑎𝑛𝑑 = 26.8 𝑀𝑊 ≈ 27 𝑀𝑊
Determining the expected peak demand for the year 2018,
2018 𝐸𝑥𝑝𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑃𝑒𝑎𝑘 𝐷𝑒𝑚𝑎𝑛𝑑 = 35 𝑀𝑊 (1 + 0.04)5
2018 𝐸𝑥𝑝𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑃𝑒𝑎𝑘 𝐷𝑒𝑚𝑎𝑛𝑑 = 42.6 𝑀𝑊 ≈ 43 𝑀𝑊
The designers will use the 2018 forecast of average and peak demand of 27 and 43 MW,
respectively. It is significant for the designers to express the output or the designed capacity of the
plant within the succeeding years.
The area will be the island of Mindoro, specifically Oriental Mindoro if it deems suitable.
Oriental Mindoro is a province in the Philippines located in the island of Mindoro under MIMAROPA
region in Luzon, about 140 kilometers (87 mi) southwest of Manila. It covers a total area of
4,238.38 square kilometers (1,636.45 sq. mi.) occupying the eastern section of Mindoro island. The
designers chose this area due to the topography and the problems arising from insufficient supply
of power.
Materials for the construction will be selected thoroughly. Reinforced Concrete for the
totality of dam shall be used to resist the pressure created by the stored water. The material for the
penstock and surge tank will be compared so as to meet the standards and limits which a
component must possess.
1.2 Statement of the Problem
In the Philippines, many people are experiencing frequent unexpected power outages
especially in rural areas due to insufficient power generation compared to the number of total
households and business establishments. Everyday activities are affected by power outages
resulting to lower quality of living and suppressed productivity. One of the many areas that are
affected by this issue is the province of Oriental Mindoro. Based on an article published on
manilastandard.net, the consumers complained of three to eight hours of blackouts in its 15
3|Page
municipalities, including Calapan City, and Puerto Galera, a major resort destination. These
problems may also affect the tourism and economic growth of the said municipality.
1.3 Project Objectives
1.3.1 General Objectives
To propose a design of hydro-electric power plant with a rated capacity of 43 MW of power

in the island of Mindoro specifically the province of Oriental Mindoro that is being serviced by
ORMECO (Oriental Mindoro Electric Cooperative) for increasing the power supply of the province.
1.3.2 Specific Objectives
The specific objectives of this project are as follows:

▪ To design a Hydro-electric Power Plant which is based on the average and peak demand
of 27 and 43 MW that will cope for the electricity demand of the people of Oriental
Mindoro.
▪ To design an economical and sustainable power generating plant.
▪ To evaluate the influence of multiple constraints stated by the design inputs and
requirements, design trade-offs of materials to be used for construction, and the standards
governing the construction of such power plant.
▪ To present the detailed design and the cost estimate of the construction of Hydro-electric
Power Plant.
1.4 The Client
The clients for this project are Oriental Mindoro electric Cooperative (ORMECO) and the
residents of the island of Mindoro for the additional power supply or reserves for the province.
Figure 1-2: ORMECO Official Logo

(Source: http://kuryente.org.ph/electric-company/profile/40)
4|Page
Figure 1-3: ORMECO Profile

(Source: http://kuryente.org.ph/electric-company/profile/40)
Figure 1-4: ORMECO Technical Information

(Source: http://kuryente.org.ph/electric-company/technical/40)
5|Page
Figure 1-5: ORMECO Rates for Residential Customer as of November 2014

(Source: http://kuryente.org.ph/electric-company/rates/40)
6|Page
1.5 Project Scope and Limitations
The power plant design encompasses the following:

▪ Gathering and analyzing the data required for the design of hydro-electric power plant
such as topography and rainfall,
▪ Materials to be used in the design of the components of the power plant,
▪ Assumed values and power generating plant design that are relevant with the data
gathered and are based on PSME Codes and other Standards,
▪ Comprehensive design of the whole hydro-electric power plant including the estimated
cost, safety, hazards and the impacts of building one in the locality, and
▪ The factors affecting the design of hydro-electric power plant.
The limitations of the power plant design are the following:

▪ Designing a Hydro-electric Power Plant which is based on average and peak demand of
27 and 43 MW,
▪ Designers will design a reservoir-type/gravity dam Hydro-electric Power Plant, and
▪ Designers will base the design with the topography, location, and geographical area of
island of Mindoro specifically Oriental Mindoro.
7|Page
1.6 Project Development
• CONCEPTUALIZATION
• Identifying the problem and constraints
1
• SELECTION OF AREA
• Island of Mindoro, specifically Oriental Mindoro
2
• POWER OUTPUT
• 27 Average and 43 Peak Megawatt of Power
3
• DESIGN GATHERING AND INPUTS

• Proposed location site
• Advantages and disadvantages
• Type and Layout of Hydroelectric Power Plant
4 • Main components and the assumed values
• Design Codes and Standards
• COMPUTATION
• Components Specifications
5 • Economic Analysis
• CONSTRAINTS
• Economical, Efficiency and Sustainability
6
• FINAL DESIGN OF HYDROELECTRIC POWER PLANT

• Conclusion, Recommendations and Components Catalogues
7
Figure 1-6: Project Development Process
8|Page
Conceptualization
The designers encountered a problem that they want to solve which connects with their field of
study. There were several planning and brainstorming happened in searching for the desired goals.
By identifying the problem, it simultaneously figuring out what is the purpose of the project.
Selection of Area
The designers proposed a place where there is a problem regarding the power supply. The
designers have chosen the island of Mindoro specifically Oriental Mindoro due to shortage of
power supply and reserves.
Power Output
The designers propose a hydroelectric power plant that has a rated capacity of 43 Megawatt of
power.
Design Gathering and Inputs
The designers discuss thoroughly the type of hydroelectric power plant to be constructed which is a
reservoir-type and its subsequent advantages and disadvantages. Also, the designers will present
a layout of the plant with its components and the processes of each. This design should meet the
standards and codes that are used by the Mechanical Engineers regarding power plant designs.
Computation
The designers will elaborate thoroughly the computations of the design of the whole hydroelectric
power plant and its components and the outputs of the computation will serve as a basis of
selection of components through catalogs.
Final Design
The designers will select the actual specifications of the components of the power plant through
catalogs with the computations as a basis.
9|Page
CHAPTER 2
DESIGN INPUTS
Design inputs are inputs that are necessary to attain and to design the projected power
plant in order to meet its objectives. In this section, the designers introduce the factors affecting the
progress of the project. It includes flow charts, the process of the proposed power plants, the data
gathered about the proposed power plants from the different textbooks, handbooks, websites,
references, and also from the government webpages to ensure the accuracy of the data.
The proponents also include the following basis so as to incorporate with the design of the
power plants and come up with the inputs needed for establishing the plants:
▪ Power Generation Technology. This define the processes of the whole power plant
including its background, history, and the different types.
▪ Advantages and Disadvantages of the Power Plant. It portrays the positive and
negative impacts of the proposed power plant in the specified location.
▪ Power Plant Layout. It shows the parts and its subsequent processes of the power
generating plant.
▪ Main Components. This expands the definition and the processes of the main
components or parts of the power generating plant.
▪ Specified Location. It locates the specific location to establish the plant including the
type of surrounding of the specific location.
▪ Rainfall Data. This presents the total rainfall of the prospected area in the year 2015 to
2016. It will serve as a basis for the computation of hydroelectric power plant.
▪ Assumed Values. This presents the designers’ assumed values for the computation of
the power generation plant including its components’ specifications. This output of the
computation shall serve as a basis in choosing the actual specifications of the
components which will be presented in Chapter 5.
▪ Formulas. This presents the formulas that the designers used for the designing of every
component of the hydroelectric power plant and to come up with the required
specifications of each components. Formulas will be used in the next chapter for the
solution of the computation.
Simultaneously, the designers proposed a reservoir-type hydroelectric power plant for

the establishing the needed design inputs through three (3) different proposed locations and the
number of hours of operation (number of hours of operation shall be discussed at Chapter 3).
10 | P a g e
2.1 Proposed Power Generating Plant: Hydroelectric Power Plant
The designers proposed hydroelectric power plant as the power producing facility. This
section shall define and explain the hydroelectric power plant as a whole for the determination of
the needed design inputs for the said power plant. Also, this section covers the factors and basis to
understand this type of power generating plant.
2.1.1 Background
Hydroelectric power, using the potential energy of water from rivers, dams, and any other
sources, now comprises of about 17.5% of total electric supply in the world. This type of power is
normally applied to peak-load demand which can be started and stopped easily by means of gates.
Hydro energy is available in many forms. This includes the potential energy from high
heads of water retained in dams, kinetic energy from the current flow in rivers and tidal barrages,
and kinetic energy from static movements of waves and water masses. For harnessing the energy
of the water, many ingenious ways have been devised. The most involved way is directing the
water flow through a turbine to generate electricity. Other used the hydro energy to drive hydraulic
and pneumatic mechanism to perform the task. (http://www.mpoweruk.com/hydro_power.htm)
Hydroelectric power plants are the systems which generate electricity following the law of
conservation of energy and the gravitational law. They are composed basically of a water reservoir,
turbines, electric motor or generator, rotors and stators and channeling pipes. The mechanism
of hydroelectric power plants follows the transference of kinetic energy of flowing water to
mechanical energy of the blades when the water strikes with them forcefully. The movement of the
blades is transferred to a generator which builds up a strong electric field thus producing electricity
by the flow of electrons. This electricity is then transferred to the consumers via channeled vessels.
The amount of electricity produced depends upon the difference in the heights of water called
‘head’ and the volume of water flowing.
(https://www.conserve-energy-future.com/hydroelectricplanttypes.php)
This energy is a free energy. It means that it can be extracted easily and is renewable.
Many dams were built for other purposes and hydropower was added later. In the United States,
there are about 80,000 dams of which only 2,400 produce power. The other dams are for
recreation, stock/farm ponds, flood control, water supply, and irrigation. Hydropower plants range
in size from small systems for a home or village to large projects producing electricity for utilities.
(https://energy.gov/eere/water/types-hydropower-plants)
2.1.2 History
The power of falling water has been used to produce electricity for over 135 years. Some
of the earliest innovations in using water power were conceived in China during the Han
Dynasty between 202 BC and 9 AD. Trip hammers powered by the vertical -set water wheel
were used to pound and hull grain, break ore, and in early paper-making. The availability of
water power has long been closely associated with kick-starting economic growth. When
Richard Arkwright set up Cromford Mill in England’s Derwent valley in 1771 to spin cotton and
11 | P a g e
so set up one of the world’s first factory systems, hydropower was the energy source he
used.
Indeed, he was so convinced of the benefits of hydro that when he started using a
steam engine six years later, he used it to pump water into the mill pond rather than to drive
machinery directly. His enterprise quickly spread throughout the valley, and the massive
industrial buildings that he set up still stand – in a world heritage site.
While hydropower was quickly overwhelmed in the relatively flat English landscape by
coal-fired steam engines and, later, electricity generation – it was hydropower that set the
country’s industrial revolution running. In many regions of the world, hydropower has played
an equally major role in increasing and transforming development.
Some of the key developments in hydropower technology happened in the first half of
the 19th century. In 1827, French engineer Benoit Fourneyron developed a turbine capable of
producing around 6 horsepower – the earliest version of the Fourneyron reaction turbine.
In 1849, British–American engineer James Francis developed the first modern water
turbine – the Francis turbine – which remains the most widely-used water turbine in the world
today.
In the 1870s, American inventor Lester Allan Pelton developed the Pelton wheel, an
impulse water turbine, which he patented in 1880.
Into the 20th century, Austrian professor Viktor Kaplan developed the Kaplan turbine
in 1913 – a propeller-type turbine with adjustable blades.
The world’s first hydroelectric project was used to power a single lamp in the Cragside
country house in Northumberland, England, in 1878. Four years later, the first plant to serve a
system of private and commercial customers was opened in Wisconsin, USA, and within a
decade, hundreds of hydropower plants were in operation.
In North America, hydropower plants were installed at Grand Rapids, Michigan

(1880), Ottawa, Ontario (1881), Dolgeville, New York (1881), and Niagara Falls, New York
(1881). They were used to supply mills and light some local buildings.
By the turn of the 20 th century the technology was spreading round the globe, with
Germany producing the first three-phase hydro-electric system in 1891, and Australia
launching the first publicly owned plant in the Southern Hemisphere in 1895.
In 1895, the world’s largest hydroelectric development of the time, the Edward Dean
Adams Power Plant, was created at Niagara Falls.
In 1905, a hydroelectric station was built on the Xindian creek near Taipei, with an
installed capacity of 500 kW. This was quickly followed by the first station in mainland China,
the Shilongba plan in the Yunnan province, which was built in 1910 and put into operation in
12 | P a g e
1912. Upon completion Shilongba had an installed capacity of 480 kW – today it is still in
operation with an installed capacity of 6 MW.
In the first half of the 20 th century, the USA and Canada led the way in hydropower
engineering. At 1,345 MW, the Hoover Dam on the Colorado River became the world’s largest
hydro-electric plant in 1936, surpassed by the Grand Coulee Dam (1,974 MW at th e time,
6,809 MW today) in Washington in 1942.
From the 1960s through to the 1980s, large hydropower developments were carried
out in Canada, the USSR, and Latin America.
Over the last few decades, Brazil and China have become world leaders in
hydropower. The Itaipu Dam, straddling Brazil and Paraguay, opened in 1984 at 12,600 MW
(it has since been enlarged and uprated to 14,000 MW), and is today only eclipsed in size by
the 22,500 MW China Three Gorges Dam, which opened in 2008.
(https://www.hydropower.org/a-brief-history-of-hydropower)
2.1.3 Classification of Hydroelectric Power Plant
Hydroelectric power plants can be classified according to:
1. Capacity of Water Flow Regulation

2. Head under which they work
3. The basis of operation load supplied
2.1.3.1 Capacity of Water Flow Regulation
Based on the capacity of water flow regulation, the hydroelectric power plant can be sub-
classified into:
a. Run-off River Plants without Pondage
b. Run-off River Plants with Pondage
c. Reservoir Plant
d. Pumped Storage Plant
a. Run-off River Plants without Pondage
These plants do not have storage or pondages to store water; Run-off river plants without
pondages uses water as it comes. The plant can use water as and when available. Since,
generation capacity of these type of plants depend on the rate of flow of water, during rainy
season high flow rate may mean some quantity of water to go as waste while during low run-off
periods, due to low flow rates, the generating capacity will be low.
13 | P a g e
Figure 2-1(a): Typical Layout of Run-off River Plant

(Source: http://ruahaenergy.com/hydro/hydro-overview/)
Figure 2-1(b): Chief Joseph Dam near Bridgeport, Washington, USA

(Source: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chief_Joseph_Dam#/media/File:Chief_Joseph_Dam.jpg)
14 | P a g e
b. Run-off River Plant with Pondage
Pondage allows storage of water during lean periods and use of this water during
peak periods. Based on the size of the storage structure provided, it may be possible to
cope with hour-to-hour fluctuations. This type of plant can be used on parts of the load
curve as required and is more useful than a plant without pondage. If pondage is provided,
tail race conditions should be such that floods do not raise tail-race water level, thus
reducing the head on the plant and impairing its effectiveness. This type of plant is
comparatively more conscientious and its generating capacity is based on available rate of
flow of water.
Figure 2-2: Hugh Keenleyside Dam operated by BC Hydro, and the Arrow Lakes Generating
Station
(Source: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keenleyside_Dam)
c. Reservoir Plant
A reservoir plant is that which has a reservoir of such size as to accede carrying over
storage from wet season to the next dry season. Water is stored behind the dam and is
available to the plant with control as required. This type of plant has better extent and can be
used efficiently throughout the year. Its firm capacity can be expanded and can be utilized
either as a base load plant or as a peak load plant as required. It can also be used on any
portion of the load curve as required. Maximum hydro-electric plants are of this type.
15 | P a g e
Figure 2-3(a): Reservoir Hydroelectric Power Plant

(Source: https://www.green-buildings.com/articles/hydroelectric-power-plants-work/)
Figure 2-3(b): Adam Beck Hydroelectric Generating Stations

(Source: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sir_Adam_Beck_Hydroelectric_Generating_Stations)
16 | P a g e
d. Pumped Storage Plant
Pumped hydroelectric storage facilities store energy in the form of water in an upper
reservoir, pumped from another reservoir at a lower elevation. During periods of high electricity
demand, power is generated by releasing the stored water through turbines in the same
manner as a conventional hydropower station. During periods of low demand, the upper
reservoir is recharged by using lower-cost electricity from the grid to pump the water back to
the upper reservoir.
Pumped storage hydropower can provide energy-balancing, stability, storage capacity, and
ancillary grid services such as network frequency control and reserves. This is due to the
ability of pumped storage plants, like other hydroelectric plants, to respond to potentially large
electrical load changes within seconds. Pumped storage historically has been used to balance
load on a system, enabling large nuclear or thermal generating sources to operate at peak
efficiencies. A pumped storage project would typically be designed to have 6 to 20 hours of
hydraulic reservoir storage for operation at. By increasing plant capacity in terms of size and
number of units, hydroelectric pumped storage generation can be concentrated and shaped to
match periods of highest demand, when it has the greatest value.
(http://energystorage.org/energy-storage/technologies/pumped-hydroelectric-storage)
Figure 2-4: Principle of a Pumped Storage Power Plant

(Source: http://www.ourworldofenergy.com/vignettes.php?type=other-renewables-energy&id=10)
17 | P a g e
2.1.3.2 Classification of Hydroelectric Power Plant According to Availability of Water Head
This classification of hydroelectric power plant is the most popular and conventional
classification. The summarization of this classification is presented by table 1.1.
Table 2-1: Classification of Hydroelectric Power Plant based on Available Head
Types of Plant Head
Low Head Plants less than 30 meters
Medium Head Plants 30 to 100 meters
High Head Plants Above 100 meters
a. Low Head Plants
Low head hydroelectric plants are power plants which generally utilize heads of only a few
meters or less. Power plants of this type may utilize a low dam or weir to channel water, or no
dam and simply use the run-of-the-river type. Run of the river generating stations cannot store
water, thus their electric output varies with seasonal flows of water in a river. A large volume of
water must pass through a low head hydroelectric plant’s turbine in order to produce a useful
amount of power. Hydro-electric facilities with a capacity of less than about 25 MW (1 MW =
1,000,000 W) are generally referred to as ‘‘small hydro’’, although hydro-electric technology is
basically the same regardless of generating capacity.
Figure 2-5: Low Head (canal type) Power Plant
18 | P a g e
b. Medium Head Plants
These plants consist of a large dam in a mountainous area which creates a huge reservoir.
This type of plant uses Francis, propeller or kaplan turbine as prime mover. The forebay
provided at the beginning of pen-stock serves as water reservoir. The forebay draws water
from main reservoir through a canal or tunnel. Forebay also stores the rejected water when the
load on the turbine decreases. The Forebay itself works as a surge tank in the plant. Dams are
also used for flood control, irrigation, recreation, and often are the main source of potable
water for many communities.
Figure 2-6: Medium Head Plant
c. High Head Plants
‘‘High head’’ power plants are the most common and generally utilize a dam to store water
at an increased elevation. The use of a dam to impound water also provides the capability of
storing water during rainy periods and releasing it during dry periods. This results in the
consistent and reliable production of electricity, able to meet demand. Heads for this type of
power plant may be greater than 1,000 m. Most large hydro-electric facilities are of the high-
head variety. High-head plants with storage are very valuable to electric utilities, because they
can be quickly adjusted to meet the electrical demand on a distribution system.
At one end of the reservoir are provided outlets for water leading into forebays or surge
tanks and from there to the turbines through penstocks. Trashracks are fitted at the inlets of
the pressure tunnels to prevent the foreign matter from going into the tunnels. Since the tunnel
carries the total head corresponding to actual reservoir level, the choice of the pressure tunnel
should be given a very careful consideration. A pressure tunnel can be replaced either by a
canal or pressure conducts. The surge tank is provided before the valve house and after the
tunnel from the head works. The butterfly valves or the sluice type valves which are electrically
driven, control the water flow in the penstocks. These valves are there in valve house. Gate
valves are also there in the power house to control the water flow through the turbines. The
Francis turbine and Pelton wheel are the common prime movers used in high head plants.
19 | P a g e
Figure 2-7: High Head Plant
2.1.3.3 Classification according to the Nature of Load (Basis of Operation)
Hydropower plants are classified as on the basis of load supplied as:

a. Base Load Plants, and
b. Peak Load Plants
a. Base Load Plants
A plant supplying base load, which is more or less constant, is known as the base load
plant. Generation units work on almost constant load and their operating efficiency is usually
high. A steam or a diesel power station may share the peak load of such plant. The examples
of base load plants are run-off-river and storage type power plant.
b. Peak Load Plants
If fluctuating peak loads are met by the plant, then it is called peak load plant. Run-off-river
plants with pondage and pumped storage plants are necessarily peak load plants. In pump
storage plant as stated earlier during periods of reduced load, extra power available is used in
pumping water to a storage at high level, which may be again used up, during peak load
demands. Generally speaking, hydro power is quite suitable for peak load durations, due to its
quick starting and relatively easy in peaking up load.
20 | P a g e
2.1.4 Advantages and Disadvantages of Hydroelectric Power Plant
Hydroelectric power is a form of renewable energy and this type of power is mostly used
widely due to its numerous advantages associated with it. However, there are some significant
disadvantages with generating this kind of power.
2.1.4.1 Advantages
1. Reliable and Efficient
Hydroelectric power is widely considered both a reliable and efficient electricity source.
Providing there exists an adequate supply of water, hydroelectricity production can be constant
and some countries have been successful in producing a large proportion of their total
electricity capacity from it.
2. Clean and Renewable
Another advantage of hydroelectricity is that it is both clean and renewable. No fossil fuels
have to be burnt to produce hydroelectricity and therefore there are no harmful emissions as a
result. Water is a renewable energy source that will never run out and the use of this resource
helps to conserve non-renewable energy sources for other uses. This also allows countries to
become less reliant on external supplies of fossil fuels such as coal, oil and natural gas which
can become disrupted due to conflict, the economy and supply and demand.
3. Flexible
Hydroelectric dams have a degree of flexibility when it comes to meeting real-time energy
demands. When high or low volumes of electricity are required, operators of a hydroelectric
dam can alter the water intake to increase or decrease the flow of water into the dam thus
generating the right level of electricity. This alteration can be completed in a very short space
of time when compared to traditional power stations.
4. Economical
Hydroelectric power is very economical to produce once the initial hydroelectric dam has
been constructed. Hydroelectric dams have very low operating and maintenance costs when
compared to those of more traditional power stations. Tied in with the economic advantages is
the fact that hydroelectric power is invulnerable to the fluctuating cost of fossil fuels, helping to
provide a more stable economy with predictable energy prices.
5. Additional Uses
Hydroelectric dams are often designed to create a large reservoir to one side of the dam
wall. This body of water is commonly used for not only producing electricity via the dam but
also for providing a water supply to surrounding towns and cities. This reduces the cost of
building a separate reservoir to supply the water.
21 | P a g e
6. Recreation and Tourism
The reservoir created during the construction of a hydroelectric dam can also be used as a
recreational facility with many home to kayaking and windsurfing facilities. In addition, the
larger, more noticeable hydroelectric dams can become landmarks for a country or region
helping to bring in large volumes of tourists each year providing a boost to the local economy.
2.1.4.2 Disadvantages
1. Environmental Impact
When a hydroelectric dam is built, a reservoir is formed behind one face of the dam wall.
Depending on the size of the dam, this can have an impact over a large area as land is flooded
as the reservoir fills which brings disastrous consequences for wildlife, fish and even plants.
Changes in river levels, flow patterns and water temperature all contribute to how severe this
impact will be.
Not only does the local environment suffer but so does the environment of areas
downstream. Depending on the scale of the reservoir and how much water it holds back, large
areas many miles downstream could be affected by drought and other consequences. This can
also have an impact on international relations should one country cause an environmental
disaster in a neighboring country.
2. Displacement of People
Often, when land needs to be flooded to form a reservoir for a hydroelectric dam, people
will be displaced. Villages and even small towns may have to relocate to make way for a
reservoir, destroying communities in the process. Although financial incentives are often
provided to persuade people to relocate, others may be forced to relocate from their place.
3. Expensive to Build
Hydroelectric dams are notoriously expensive to build. Lots of planning, engineering and
construction is required before a dam can start producing power to start paying for itself. This
process takes many years and results in a long pay back or return on investment (ROI).
4. Limited Places to Build
As hydroelectric dams have to be built in areas with the perfect conditions (landscape,
precipitation levels etc.), the majority of these places have already been used for hydroelectric
dam construction. Nowadays, there are limited places to build new dams that will provide the
highest reliability and efficiencies.
22 | P a g e
5. Safety Concerns
Although the safety levels of modern dams are considered good, there are fears over the
safety of older dams. There have been numerous disasters relating to dam failure with the
most notable taking place in China in 1975 which killed 171,000 people.
(https://www.clean-energy-ideas.com/hydro/hydropower/advantages-and-disadvantages-of-
hydroelectric-power)
2.1.5 Hydroelectric Power Plant Layout
Figure 2-8: Hydroelectric Power Plant Layout
Table 2-2: Hydroelectric Power Plant Layout Parts

PARTS:
A Water H Hydro-turbine
B Dam I Generator
C Inlet J Exciter
D Penstock K Transformer
E Surge Tank L Draft Tube
F Gage M Spillway
G Valve N River
23 | P a g e
2.1.6 Main Components
Figure 2-9: Flow Sheet of Hydroelectric Power Plant
Hydroelectric Power Plant has five main components, namely:

a. Catchment Area and Water Reservoir
b. Dam and the Intake
c. Inlet Water Ways
d. Power House and equipment
e. Tail Race
a. Catchment Area and Water Reservoir
The area behind the dam, which collects rain water, drains into a stream or river, is called
catchment area. Water collected from catchment area is stored in a reservoir, behind the dam.
The purpose of the reservoir is to store the water during rainy season and supply it during dry
season. Water surface in the storage reservoir is known as head race level or simply head
race. A reservoir can be either natural or artificial. A natural reservoir is a lake in high
mountains and an artificial reservoir is made by constructing a dam across the river. Water
held in upstream reservoir is called storage whereas water behind the dam at the plant is
called pondage.
b. Dam and the Intake
A dam is a structure of masonry earth or rock fill built across a river. It has two functions:
a. To provide the head of water
b. To create storage or pondage
Many times, high dams are built only to provide the necessary head to the power plants.
Concrete and masonry dams are quite popular and are made as:
a. Solid gravity dam
24 | P a g e
b. The buttress dam

c. The arched dam
The topography of the site and the foundation considerations mainly govern the type of the
dam to be selected. A narrow deep gorge is best bridged with a concrete or masonry dam
whereas an earth dam best suits a wide valley. The basic requirements of a dam are economy
and safety. The dam foundation must provide for dam stability under different forces and
supports its weight. The foundation should be sufficiently impervious to prevent seepage of
water under the dam.
The intake house includes the head works, which are the structure at the intake of
conduits, tunnels or flumes. There are booms screens or trash racks, sluices for by-passing
debris and gates or valves for controlling the water flow. Ice and floating log are prevented by
booms, which divert them to a bypass chute. Trash rack is made up of steel bars and is placed
across the intake to prevent the debris from going into the intake. Gates and valves control the
rate of water flow entering the intake. Gate discharge excess water during flood duration.
c. Inlet Water Ways
Inlet water ways are the passages through which water is conveyed from the dam to the
power house. It includes canal, penstock (closed pipe) or tunnel, flume, foreway and surge
tank.
Tunnel. It is made by cutting the mountains where canal or pipe line cannot be used due to
topography. Tunneling provides a direct and a short route for the water passages.
Penstocks. Water may be conveyed to turbines through open conduits or closed pressure
pipes called penstocks made of reinforced concrete or steel. It is desirable that the penstock
should be slopping towards the power house and its grade is adjusted as per the topography.
Penstocks usually are not covered and placed as exposed pipes, which facilitates easy
maintenance and repair. When there is danger from slides of now, rock, earth, etc. covered
penstocks are used. The thickness of the penstocks as working pressure or head of the water
increases. A large diameter of penstock gives lesser friction loss. Long penstocks are
manufactured in sections together by welding or riveting, the welded joints give less friction
loss.
Surge Tanks. These are additional storage spaces near the power unit, usually provided in
high head or medium head plants when there is considerable distance between the water
source and the power unit, needs a long penstock. The surge tank furnishes space for holding
water during load rejection by the turbine and for furnishing additional water when the load on
the turbine increases. There is sudden increase in pressure in the penstock due to sudden
decrease on the rate of water flow to the turbine when the load the generator decreases, then
due to action of governor, the gates admitting water to the turbines are suddenly closed, this
causes sudden rise of pressure in the penstock above normal due to reduced load on
generator, which is known as water hammer. Surge tank relieves water hammer pressures
when the penstock under conditions of sudden changes in condition of water flow. Thus, the
surge tank serves to regulate the flow of water through the conveyance system, to relieve
25 | P a g e
water hammer pressures, and to improve performance of the machines by providing better
speed regulation. Several designs of surge tanks have been adopted in power stations, the
important considerations being the amount of water to be stored, the amount of pressure to be
relieved of, and the space available at the site of construction.
Forebay. The water carried by the power canals is distributed to various penstocks leading to
the turbine, through the forebay, also known as the head pond. Water is temporarily stored in
the forebay, in the event of a rejection of load by the turbine and there is withdrawal from it
when the load is increased. Thus, the forebay also acts as a sort of regulating reservoir. This
can be considered as naturally provided surge tanks as it does the work of surge tank. The
head pond or foreway is created at the end of the power canal by widening it into the form of a
small basin, which can store some water for sudden demands of the turbine.
Spillways. These structures provide for discharge of the surplus water from the storage
reservoir into the river on the downstream side of the dam. It includes the gate and control
gearing. Spillway is considered a safety device for a dam, which acts as a safety valve, which
has the capacity to discharge major floods without damage to the dam. It keeps the reservoir
level below the predetermined maximum level.
d. Power House and Equipment
The power house is a building in which the turbines, alternators and the auxiliary plant are
housed. Here conversion of energy of water to electrical energy takes place. The power house
consists of two main part, a substructure to support the hydraulic and electrical equipment and
superstructure to house and protect these equipment. The superstructure mostly is a building,
housing all operating equipment. The generating units and exciters are usually located on the
ground floor. The turbines are placed just below the floor level if they rotate on vertical axis.
Theses turbines which rotate on a horizontal axis are placed on the ground floor alongside the
generator. The turbines which are common use are Pelton, Francis, Kaplan and Propeller
turbines.
e. Tail Race and Outlet Water Way
Tail race is a passage for discharging the water leaving the turbine into the river and in
certain cases, the water from the tail race can be pumped back into the original reservoir.
Water after doing work on turbine runner passes through the draft tube to tail race. The water
held in the tail race is called as tail race water level. The draft tube is an essential part of
reaction turbine installation. It is a diverging passage from the point of runner exit down to the
tail race. It is so shaped to decelerate the flow with a minimum loss so that the remaining
kinetic energy of water coming out of the runner is efficiently regained by converting into
suction head, thereby increasing the total pressure difference on the runner. Thus, a draft tube
has two main functions:
i. It permits the establishment of negative head below the runner and so makes it
possible to set the turbine above the tail race level, where it is more easily accessible
and yet does not cause a sacrifice in head.
26 | P a g e
ii. Its diverging passage converts a large portion of the velocity energy rejected from the
runner into useful pressure head, thereby increasing the efficiency of the turbine.
2.1.7 Location
The designers survey the area of Oriental Mindoro using different kinds of maps. The
prospect area to build a water dam for the hydroelectric power plant must be near in a body of
water like river and/or surrounded by mountains.
2.1.7.1 First Proposed Location
The detail for the first proposed location is discussed here through different kinds of maps.
The designers will propose a location near river. For this first location, the designers have chosen
the location near the Bongabong River. The coordinates of the first proposed location is 12˚ 44’ 45’’
latitude and 121˚ 29’ 08’’ longitude.
2.1.7.1.1 Topographical Map
The topographical map shows the elevation and the surface of the area. In this map, the
rough surfaces, mountains and hills, can be seen. Also, the height of the surrounding area can be
seen and can be used as a basis for constructing the hydroelectric power plant.
Figure 2-10: Topographical Map of the Area near the Bongabong River
(Source: Google Maps)
27 | P a g e
Figure 2-11: Terrain Map through Color Ranges of the 1st Prospect Location
(Source: http://en-ph.topographic-map.com/places/Oriental-Mindoro-8928294/)
The Designers choose the area near the Bongabong River to construct the water dam for
hydroelectric power plant use.
2.1.7.1.2 Three-Dimensional Map
This map shows the near actual landscape of the area near the Bongabong River. The
figures below show the specific prospect area of the water dam.
Figure2-12: Satellite View of the 1st Prospect Area

28 | P a g e
Figure 2-13: Three-Dimensional View of the 1st Prospect Area

From these maps, the designers pointed out the prospect area. The prospect area to place
the water dam and the hydroelectric power plant is in between the two mountains near the
Bongabong River. There will be a diversion of some volume of river water to the side of the
mountain where the water will be stored and collected. The designers will use a diversion to not
totally interrupt the natural flow and the ecosystem of the freshwater.
2.1.7.2 Second Proposed Location
For the second proposed location, the detail shall be shown in this section through maps.
seen and can be used as a basis for constructing the hydroelectric power plant. The second
proposed location shall be at Socorro, Oriental Mindoro and it is near to a body of water. The DMS
coordinate of the second proposed location is 13˚ 03’ 18’’ North, 121˚ 24’ 25.19’’ East.
29 | P a g e
Figure 2-14: Topographical Map of the 2nd Prospect Location near a Body of Water
Figure 2-15: Terrain Map through Color Ranges of the 2nd Prospect Location
30 | P a g e
This map shows the near actual landscape of the area near a river in Socorro, Oriental
Mindoro. The succeeding figures show the specific prospect area of the water dam.
Figure 2-16: Satellite View of the 2nd Prospect Area

Figure 2-17: Three-Dimensional View of the 2nd Prospect Area

31 | P a g e
The second proposed location for the construction of the hydroelectric power plant is near
in a river with surrounding mountains and a big area for the reservoir of water.
2.1.7.3 Third Proposed Location
For the third Proposed location, the details shall be in maps and will be discussed by this
section.
seen and can be used as a basis for constructing the hydroelectric power plant. The third proposed
location shall be at Caagutayan, San Teodoro, Oriental Mindoro near Mt. Halcon. The DMS
coordinates of the third proposed location is 13˚ 19’ 60’’ North, 121˚ 00’ 0’’ East.
Figure 2-18: Topographical Map of the 3rd Prospect Location at Caagutayan. San Teodoro,
Oriental Mindoro
32 | P a g e
Figure 2-19: Terrain Map Through Color Ranges of 3rd Prospect Location
This map shows the near actual landscape of the area in Caagutayan, San Teodoro,
Oriental Mindoro. The figures below show the specific prospect area of the water dam.
Figure 2-20: Satellite View of the 3rd Prospect Area

33 | P a g e
Figure 2-21: Three-Dimensional View of the 3rd Prospect Area

The third proposed location shall be near a river and it is located near Mt. Halcon in
Caagutayan, San Teodoro, Oriental Mindoro.
The location shall be used in trade-offs to relate the advantages and disadvantages of
each and to further explain the details.
34 | P a g e
2.1.8 Rainfall Data
The designers collected information and data of the rainfall around the area. Below shows
the recorded rainfall in millimeters for every month of the year 2015 and 2016. These data were
collected in PAG-ASA office.
Table 2-3: Rainfall Data of 2015 and 2016

Rainfall (mm) Average Rainfall
Months
2015 2016 (mm) for 2 years
January 3 3 3
February 11.1 1.4 6.25
March 19.2 2.4 10.8
April 59.6 77.2 68.4
May 209.8 208.3 209.05
June 346.1 269.9 308
July 1087.9 424.2 756.05
August 352.8 1216.7 784.75
September 435.3 342.3 388.8
October 361.2 535 448.1
November 398.8 159.9 279.35
December 136.4 33.6 85
Total Average: 278.9625
35 | P a g e
2.1.9 Assumptions
For the computation of hydroelectric power plant, the designers assume certain values for
the completion of the solution of the computation for hydroelectric power plant.
Table 2-4: Assumptions of the Whole Design

Variables Assumptions
Load Factor (Power Factor of Generator) 0.8
Turbine Efficiency 85%
%Seepage 2%
%Evaporation 3%
The load factor or the generator’s power factor assumption comes from the standard rating
of NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) which is a body of standard that is widely
recognize (https://goo.gl/rVzfs9). For the turbine efficiency, the typical value ranges from 80 to 90%
(http://www.power-eng.com/articles/print/volume-111/issue-6/features/steam-generator-
efficiency.html). The designers’ assumption is the mean value of the turbine efficiency which is
85%. For the %seepage and %evaporation, these are the losses in volume of water in dam due to
environmental factors like heat of the sun and the permeability of the soil. For the assumption, the
designers used 2% and 3% foe %seepage and %evaporation, respectively.
Additionally, there are assumptions on each of the proposed locations. Due to the fact that
there are factors that will affect the design based on the area or location of the hydroelectric power
plant.
For the first proposed location, the assumptions are given by the Table 1-4.
Table 2-5: Assumptions based on the First Proposed Location
Shaded Area 17,000 hectares
Average Demand Operation 14 hrs

Hours of Operation
Peak Demand Operation 10 hrs
For the shaded area of the first proposed location, the next figure shows the estimated
shaded area.
36 | P a g e
Figure 2-22: First Proposed Location Estimated Shaded Area

(Source: https://www.freemaptools.com/area-calculator.htm)
For the second proposed location, the assumptions are given by the Table 1-5.
Table 2-6: Assumptions based on the Second Proposed Location

Hours of Operation
For the shaded area of the second proposed location, the next figure shows the estimated
shaded area.
37 | P a g e
Figure 2-23: Second Proposed Location Estimated Shaded Area

For the third proposed location, the assumptions are given by the Table 1-6.
Table 2-7: Assumptions based on the Third Proposed Location

Hours of Operation
For the shade area of the third proposed location, the next figure shows the estimated
shaded area.
38 | P a g e
Figure 2-24: Third Proposed Location Estimated Shaded Area

For the shaded area, the designers use an online calculator to determine the area around
the proposed locations. The link of the online calculator is: https://www.freemaptools.com/area-
calculator.htm. This online calculator uses maps and users of this website will search for the
location then clicking the map to create points. The points are connected with each other to
produce polygons which will be used to calculate the area inside of it. For the hours of operation,
the designers’ assumptions are based on the peak and off-peak demand hours given by Meralco
(https://corporatepartners.meralco.com.ph/products-services-and-programs/peak-peak-program).
From these data, the designers create three options based on the hours of operation of average
and peak demand. This data shall be used in the calculations later in this design.
39 | P a g e
2.1.10 Formulas
This section provides the formulas that will be used for the design of the hydroelectric
power plant. These are the essential and governing equations for the determination of the values
needed for the construction, manufacturing, and accurate measurements and selection of
materials.
2.1.10.1 Generator Efficiency (ηg)
Generators do not produce the 100% power. There are losses due to windings,
mechanical, frictional, etc. and the generator efficiency is the basis of this losses. Generator
efficiency is given by the equation stated below.
0.055
𝜂𝑔 = 0.98 − × 𝑅𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝐿𝑜𝑎𝑑
Eq. 1.1
√𝑃𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 𝑂𝑢𝑡𝑝𝑢𝑡 (𝑘𝑊)
3
1000
𝑊ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒:
𝜂𝑔 = 𝐺𝑒𝑛𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑜𝑟 𝐸𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦
𝑅𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝐿𝑜𝑎𝑑 = 𝑃𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 𝐹𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝐺𝑒𝑛𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑜𝑟
2.1.10.2 Water Volume at Shaded Area (Vwsa)
Vwsa shall be used for the determination of the volume of water collection inside the dam.
This can be calculated using by the formula given below.
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 𝑅𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑓𝑎𝑙𝑙 × 𝑆ℎ𝑎𝑑𝑒𝑑 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 Eq. 1.2
𝑅𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑓𝑎𝑙𝑙 = 𝐴𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑅𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑓𝑎𝑙𝑙 𝑖𝑛 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎, 𝑚
𝑆ℎ𝑎𝑑𝑒𝑑 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 = 𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑢𝑚𝑝𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑡ℎ𝑟𝑜𝑢𝑔ℎ 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑢𝑠𝑒 𝑜𝑓
𝐼𝑛𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑛𝑒𝑡 − 𝑎𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝐶𝑎𝑙𝑐𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑜𝑟, 𝑚2
2.1.10.3 Water Volume in Dam (VWD)
Water volume in dam is the ideal volume of water that can be hold by the dam. This can be
solved by using the formula given below.
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 (1 − % 𝑠𝑒𝑒𝑝𝑎𝑔𝑒 − % 𝑒𝑣𝑎𝑝𝑜𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛) Eq. 1.3
40 | P a g e
2.1.10.4 Volume Flow Rate of Water (Q)
The volume flow rate is the rate of water flow that is given off by the plant. This can be
determined by using the formula below.
𝑉𝑊𝐷
𝑄= Eq. 1.4
𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒
2.1.10.5 Power of Turbine (Pt) through Power Output
The power of turbine is expressed in kW or MW. This is the equivalent power generated by
the turbine. For the determination of this power, use the equation given below?
𝑃𝑜
𝑃𝑡 = Eq. 1.5
(𝜂𝑡)(𝜂𝑔)
𝑃𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 𝑂𝑢𝑡𝑝𝑢𝑡, 𝑃𝑜 = 𝑃𝑒𝑎𝑘 𝐷𝑒𝑚𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑃𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟
2.1.10.6 Power of Turbine (Pt) through Water Power
The power of turbine can be equated with the formula of water power which is given by the
equation below.
𝑃𝑡 = 𝑄 × 𝛾 × 𝐻𝑁 ′ Eq. 1.6
𝑚3
𝑄 = 𝑉𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑒 𝐹𝑙𝑜𝑤 𝑅𝑎𝑡𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑊𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟,
𝑠
𝑘𝑁
𝛾 = 𝑆𝑝𝑒𝑐𝑖𝑓𝑖𝑐 𝑊𝑒𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑊𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟 = 9.81
𝑚3
𝐻𝑁′ = 𝐴𝑐𝑡𝑢𝑎𝑙 𝑁𝑒𝑡 𝐻𝑒𝑎𝑑, 𝑚
2.1.10.7 Penstock Efficiency (ηp)
Penstock efficiency deals with the ratio of the actual net head to the ideal net head of the
dam. This can be solved through the use of the equation given below.
𝐻𝑁′
𝜂𝑝 = × 100 Eq. 1.7
𝐻𝑁
𝐻𝑁 = 𝐼𝑑𝑒𝑎𝑙 𝑁𝑒𝑡 𝐻𝑒𝑎𝑑, 𝑚
41 | P a g e
𝜂𝑝 = 𝑃𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑡𝑜𝑐𝑘 𝐸𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦, (50 − 80)%
2.1.10.8 Torricelli’s Equation
Torricelli’s equation shall be used in this design to determine the velocity of water due to
the hole in the dam (the gate), due to the gravity and height of the water. This equation will help to
solve for the diameter of the penstock. The mathematical expression of the Torricelli’s Equation is
given below.
𝑉𝑡′ = √2𝑔(𝐻𝑁′ ) Eq. 1.8
𝑚
𝑔 = 𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑒𝑙𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑑𝑢𝑒 𝑡𝑜 𝐺𝑟𝑎𝑣𝑖𝑡𝑦, 9.81
𝑠2
𝑚
𝑉𝑡′ = 𝑉𝑒𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑜𝑓 𝑊𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟 𝑎𝑡 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑡𝑢𝑟𝑏𝑖𝑛𝑒 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑝𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑡𝑜𝑐𝑘,
𝑠
2.1.10.9 Volume Flow Rate (Q) based on Penstock Diameter and Velocity of Water
Volume flow rate can also be expressed by the equation given below.
2
𝜋(𝐷𝑝 ) Eq. 1.9
𝑄= × 𝑉𝑡 ′
4
𝐷𝑃 = 𝑃𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑡𝑜𝑐𝑘 𝐷𝑖𝑎𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟, 𝑚 (𝐷𝑝 ≤ 1 𝑚)
𝑉𝑡′ = 𝑉𝑒𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑜𝑓 𝑊𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟, 𝑚/𝑠
2.1.10.10 Net Head (HN)
Net head is the difference between the gross head and the height of the lower portion of
the turbine to the ground. This is expressed by the equation below.
𝐻𝑁 = 𝐻1 − 𝐻2 Eq. 1.10
𝐻1 = 𝐺𝑟𝑜𝑠𝑠 𝐻𝑒𝑎𝑑, 𝑚
𝐻2 = 𝐻𝑒𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑡𝑢𝑟𝑏𝑖𝑛𝑒 𝑡𝑜 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑔𝑟𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑑, 𝑚
42 | P a g e
2.1.10.11 Head due to Friction (Hf)
Head due to friction is the total head loss in the system. This can be expressed by the two
equations given below.
𝐻𝑓 = 𝐻𝑁 − 𝐻𝑛 ′ Eq. 1.11
𝑓 × 𝐿𝑝 × (𝑉𝑡′ )2
𝐻𝑓 = Eq. 1.12
2𝑔𝐷𝑝
𝑓 = 𝐶𝑜𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝐹𝑟𝑖𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 = (0.001 − 0.003)
𝐿𝑃 = 𝐿𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ 𝑜𝑓 𝑃𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑡𝑜𝑐𝑘, 𝑚
2.1.10.12 Degree of Inclination (ϴ)
This is the angle which is needed by the penstock in order to produce the designed
capacity. This can be determined by the use of the equation below.
𝐻𝑁
𝜃 = sin−1 ( ) Eq. 1.13
𝐿𝑝
𝜃 = 𝐴𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝐼𝑛𝑐𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 (𝜃 > 45°)
2.1.10.13 Thickness of Penstock (tp)
Thickness of penstock shall be based on the strength of the material that will be used, the
water pressure in the turbine, and the diameter of the penstock. This can be expressed by the
equation given below.
𝑃𝑤 × 𝐷𝑝
𝑡𝑝 = Eq. 1.14
2 × 𝑆𝑑
𝑃𝑤 = 𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑊𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟 𝑖𝑛 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑇𝑢𝑟𝑏𝑖𝑛𝑒, 𝑘𝑃𝑎 = 𝛾 × 𝐻𝑁 ′
𝑆𝑑 = 𝐷𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 𝑌𝑖𝑒𝑙𝑑 𝑆𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ, 𝑘𝑃𝑎
43 | P a g e
2.1.10.14 Design Yield Strength (Sd)
Design yield strength is the strength of a material with added allowance. This can be
solved by using the equation below.
𝑆𝑦
𝑆𝑑 = Eq. 1.15
𝐹. 𝑆.
𝑆𝑦 = 𝑌𝑖𝑒𝑙𝑑 𝑆𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ 𝑜𝑓 𝑀𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑙, 𝑘𝑃𝑎
𝐹. 𝑠. = 𝐹𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑆𝑎𝑓𝑒𝑡𝑦
2.1.10.15 Relative Triangle
This theorem helps to determine the length due to friction. This length starts from the surge
tank to the power house (turbine). This can be solved by using the equation below.
𝐻𝑁 𝐻𝑓
sin 𝜃 = = Eq. 1.16
𝐿𝑝 𝐿𝑓
HN
Hf
ϴ
Figure 2-25: Relative Triangle
𝐿𝑓 = 𝐿𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ 𝑑𝑢𝑒 𝑡𝑜 𝐹𝑟𝑖𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛, 𝑚
2.1.10.16 Volume of Water after the Surge Tank (Vwp)
This is the volume of water after passing the surge tank. The equation is shown below.
2
𝜋(𝐷𝑝 ) (𝐿𝑓 ) Eq. 1.17
𝑉𝑤𝑝 =
4
44 | P a g e
𝑉𝑤𝑝 = 𝑉𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑊𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟 𝑎𝑓𝑡𝑒𝑟 𝑆𝑢𝑟𝑔𝑒 𝑇𝑎𝑛𝑘, 𝑚3
2.1.10.17 Volume of Surge Tank (VST)
The Volume of surge tank shall be computed based on the length due to friction and/or
based on the diameter and height of it. To determine this, the equations below shall be used.
𝑉𝑆𝑇 = (1 + 𝑎𝑙𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒)(𝑉𝑤𝑝 ) Eq. 1.18
𝑎𝑙𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 = 𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑡𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑒, %
𝜋(𝐷𝑆𝑇 )2 (𝐻𝑆𝑇 )
𝑉𝑆𝑇 = Eq. 1.19
4
𝐷𝑆𝑇 = 𝐷𝑖𝑎𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑆𝑢𝑟𝑔𝑒 𝑇𝑎𝑛𝑘, 𝑚
𝐻𝑆𝑇 = 𝐻𝑒𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑆𝑢𝑟𝑔𝑒 𝑇𝑎𝑛𝑘, 𝑚
2.1.10.18 Height of Surge Tank (HST)
The height of surge tank shall be based on the diameter for easy calculations. The
equation is given below.
𝐻𝑆𝑇 = 3(𝐷𝑆𝑇 ) Eq. 1.20
2.1.10.19 Hydrostatic Pressure at the bottom of the Surge Tank (Pb)
Hydrostatic pressure shall be computed to be used as a basis for the determination of the
centroidal pressure inside the surge tank. The equation is given below.
𝑃𝑏 = 𝛾 × 𝐻𝑆𝑇 Eq. 1.21
45 | P a g e
2.1.10.20 Centroidal Pressure in the Surge Tank (Pc)
Centroidal pressure shall serves as a basis of the determination of the thickness of the
surge tank. Centroidal pressure is the pressure at the center of gravity of the surge tank. To
determine this, the equation below shall be used.
2
𝑃𝑐 = (𝑃𝑏 ) Eq. 1.22
3
Figure 2-26: Centroidal Pressure in the Surge Tank
2.1.10.21 Thickness of Surge Tank (tST)
Surge tank must be thick enough to overcome the pressure created by the water. For the
computation of the thickness, the equation below shall be used.
𝑃𝑐 (𝐷𝑆𝑇 )
𝑡𝑆𝑇 = Eq. 1.23
2(𝑆𝑑 )
2.1.10.22 Weight of Dam (WD)
For the computation of the weight of dam, the formula is given below.
𝑊1 + 𝑊2
𝑊𝐷 = ( ) (𝐿𝐷 )(𝐻𝐷 )(𝜌𝑐 ) Eq. 1.24
2
𝑊1 = 𝑊𝑖𝑑𝑡ℎ 𝑜𝑓 𝐷𝑎𝑚 𝑎𝑡 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝐵𝑜𝑡𝑡𝑜𝑚
𝑊2 = 𝑊𝑖𝑑𝑡ℎ 𝑜𝑓 𝐷𝑎𝑚 𝑜𝑛 𝑇𝑜𝑝
46 | P a g e
𝐻𝐷 = 𝐻𝑒𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝐷𝑎𝑚
𝐿𝐷 = 𝐿𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ 𝑜𝑓 𝐷𝑎𝑚
𝑙𝑏
𝜌𝑐 = 𝐷𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑜𝑓 𝐶𝑜𝑛𝑐𝑟𝑒𝑡𝑒 = 135
𝑓𝑡 3
Illustration for Dam:
Figure 2-27: Isometric View of Water Dam
Figure 2-28: Side View of Dam
47 | P a g e
Figure 2-29: Dimensions and Relations between Water and Dam
2.1.10.23 Weight of Water in Dam (Pw)
The weight of water in dam can be calculated from the equation below.
𝑃𝑤 = 𝐴𝑤 × 𝐿𝑑 × 𝜌𝑤 Eq. 1.25
𝐴𝑤 = 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑇𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑒𝑑 𝑖𝑛 𝑊𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑡𝑜 𝐷𝑎𝑚 = 0.5(𝐻𝑤 )(𝑥)
𝑐 (𝐻𝑤 ) 𝑊1 − 𝑊2
∗𝑥 = ;𝑐 =
𝐻𝑑 2
𝑙𝑏
𝜌𝑤 = 𝐷𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑜𝑓 𝑊𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟 = 62.4 3
𝑓𝑡
2.1.10.24 Total Weight of Dam (Wt)
Total weight of Dam can be determined by using the equation below.
𝑊𝑡 = 𝑊𝐷 + 𝑃𝑤 Eq. 1.26
48 | P a g e
2.1.10.25 Factor of Safety due to Sinking (F.S.S.)
Factor of safety due to sinking can be determined using the equation below.
𝑆𝑏 × 𝐴𝑏
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑆. = Eq. 1.27
𝑊𝑡
𝑙𝑏
𝑆𝑏 = 𝑆𝑜𝑖𝑙 𝐵𝑒𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑒, ; (1000 − 3000)𝑙𝑏/𝑓𝑡 2
𝑓𝑡 2
𝐴𝑏 = 𝐵𝑜𝑡𝑡𝑜𝑚 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 = 𝑊1 × 𝐿𝐷
2.1.10.26 Factor of Safety due to Overturning (F.S.O.)
Factor of safety due to overturning can be calculated using the equation below.
𝑊1
𝑊𝐷 ( ) + 𝑃𝑤 (𝑊1 − 𝑥 ′ )
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑂. = 2
Eq. 1.28
𝐻
𝑃𝐻 ( 𝑤 )
2
𝑥
𝑥′ =
3
𝑃𝐻 = 𝐻𝑦𝑑𝑟𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑐 𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑒 = (0.5𝐻𝑤 ) × 𝜌𝑤 × 𝐻𝑤 × 𝐿𝐷
2.1.10.27 Factor of Safety due to Sliding (F.S.L.D.)
Factor of safety due to sliding can be calculated using the equation below.
𝜇(𝑊𝑡 )
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝐿. 𝐷. = Eq. 1.29
𝑃𝐻
𝜇 = 𝐶𝑜𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝐹𝑟𝑖𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑆. = 𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑂. = 𝐹. 𝑆. 𝐿. 𝐷.
These are the formulas that he designers will use for the design of hydroelectric power
plant. The computation of the necessary values will serve as a basis for selecting the equipment
with the specifications close to the values computed. The computation of the hydroelectric power
plant shall be provided and discussed in the next chapter.
49 | P a g e
CHAPTER 3
PROJECT DESIGN
This section provides the computation of the proposed hydroelectric power plant on three
locations that the designers specified in Chapter 2. Also, the designers will show the computation
regarding of the number of operational hours for every location. The calculated value will serve as
a basis for the trade-offs in the next chapter. Additionally, the values from the chosen hydroelectric
power plant based on the location and the number of operational hours shall be used as a basis for
selecting the required equipment with the right specifications that are calculated here in this
chapter.
For the first part, from the average and peak demand of 27,000 kW and 43,000 kW,
respectively, the designers choose the higher value, which is 43,000 kW, to obtain the generator
efficiency. The rating load of the generator is 0.8. For the computation of the generator efficiency,
the Eq. 1.1 shall be used.
0.055
𝜂𝑔 = 0.98 − × 𝑅𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝐿𝑜𝑎𝑑
√𝑃𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 𝑂𝑢𝑡𝑝𝑢𝑡 (𝑘𝑊 )
3
1000
0.055
𝜂𝑔 = 0.98 − × 0.8
√43,000
3
1000
𝜂𝑔 = 0.9674407649 × 100%
𝜼𝒈 = 𝟗𝟔. 𝟕𝟒𝟒𝟎𝟕𝟔𝟒𝟗%
For the first power of turbine, the computation shall be based on the average and peak
demand. To determine the two powers of turbine, the Eq. 1.5 shall be used.
𝑃𝑜
𝑃𝑡 =
(𝜂𝑡)(𝜂𝑔)
Where the turbine efficiency (ηt) is 85%,
𝑃𝑜
𝑃𝑡 =
(0.85)(0.9674407649)
For the first power which is based on the average demand, 27,000 kW, the power of turbine is,
27,000 𝑘𝑊
𝑃𝑡1 =
(0.85)(0.9674407649)
50 | P a g e
𝑷𝒕𝟏 = 𝟑𝟐, 𝟖𝟑𝟑. 𝟕𝟒𝟕𝟓𝟗 𝒌𝑾
For the second power of turbine, the computation shall now be based on the peak
demand, 43,000 kW and the power of turbine is,
43,000 𝑘𝑊
𝑃𝑡2 =
(0.85)(0.9674407649)
𝑷𝒕𝟐 = 𝟓𝟐, 𝟐𝟗𝟎. 𝟕𝟖𝟑𝟐 𝒌𝑾
3.1 First Proposed Location
The first proposed location is located near the Bongabong River. From the Table 1-4, the
shaded area around the location is 17,000 hectares. The designers’ assumption for %seepage and
%evaporation is 2 and 3, respectively. First, convert the hectares to square meter.
10,000 𝑚2
17,000 ℎ𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑠 × = 170,000,000 𝑚2
ℎ𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑠
January
For the month of January which has an average rainfall of 3 mm, determine the water volume in
shaded area Vwsa using Eq. 1.2,
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑓𝑎𝑙𝑙 × 𝑠ℎ𝑎𝑑𝑒𝑑 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 3 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (170,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 510,000 𝑚3
Determining the volume of water in dam using the Eq. 1.3,
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 (1 − %𝑠𝑒𝑒𝑝𝑎𝑔𝑒 − %𝑒𝑣𝑎𝑝𝑜𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 510,000 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 484,500 𝑚3
Determining the flow rate (Q) using the Eq. 1.4,
𝑉𝑊𝐷 484,500 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟏𝟓, 𝟔𝟐𝟗. 𝟎𝟑𝟐𝟐𝟔
𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒 31 𝑑𝑎𝑦𝑠 𝒅𝒂𝒚
51 | P a g e
𝑚3 𝑑𝑎𝑦 ℎ𝑟
𝑄 = 15,629.03226 × ×
𝑑𝑎𝑦 24 ℎ𝑟𝑠 3600 𝑠
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟎. 𝟏𝟖𝟎𝟖𝟗𝟏𝟓𝟕𝟕
𝒔
February
For the month of February which has an average rainfall of 6.25 mm, determine the water volume
in shaded area Vwsa using Eq. 1.2,
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 6.25 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (170,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 1,062,500 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 1,062,500 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 1,009,375 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 1,009,375 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟑𝟔, 𝟎𝟒𝟗. 𝟏𝟎𝟕𝟏𝟒
𝑄 = 36,049.10714 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟎. 𝟒𝟏𝟕𝟐𝟑𝟓𝟎𝟑𝟔
𝒔
March
For the month of March which has an average rainfall of 10.8 mm, determine the water volume in
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 10.8 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (170,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
52 | P a g e
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 1,836,000 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 1,836,000 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 1,744,200 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 1,744,200 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟓𝟔, 𝟐𝟔𝟒. 𝟓𝟏𝟔𝟏𝟑
𝑄 = 56,264.51613 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟎. 𝟔𝟓𝟏𝟐𝟎𝟗𝟔𝟕𝟕
𝒔
April
For the month of April which has an average rainfall of 68.4 mm, determine the water volume in
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 68.4 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (170,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 11,628,000 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 11,628,000 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 11,046,600 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 11,046,600 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟑𝟔𝟖, 𝟐𝟐𝟎
53 | P a g e
𝑄 = 368,220 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟒. 𝟐𝟔𝟏𝟖𝟎𝟓𝟓𝟓𝟔
𝒔
May
For the month of May which has an average rainfall of 209.05 mm, determine the water volume in
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 209.05 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (170,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 35,538,500 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 35,538,500 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 33,761,575 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 33,761,575 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟏, 𝟎𝟖𝟗, 𝟎𝟖𝟑. 𝟎𝟔𝟓
𝑄 = 1,089,083.065 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟏𝟐. 𝟔𝟎𝟓𝟏𝟐𝟖𝟎𝟔
𝒔
June
For the month of June which has an average rainfall of 308 mm, determine the water volume in
54 | P a g e
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 308 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (170,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 52,360,000 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 52,360,000 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 49,742,000 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 49,742,000 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟏, 𝟔𝟓𝟖, 𝟎𝟔𝟔. 𝟔𝟔𝟕
3
𝑚 𝑑𝑎𝑦 ℎ𝑟
𝑄 = 1,658,066.667 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟏𝟗. 𝟏𝟗𝟎𝟓𝟖𝟔𝟒𝟐
𝒔
July
For the month of July which has an average rainfall of 756.05 mm, determine the water volume in
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 756.05 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (170,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 128,528,500 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 128,528,500 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 122,102,075 𝑚3
55 | P a g e
𝑉𝑊𝐷 122,102,075 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟑, 𝟗𝟑𝟖, 𝟕𝟕𝟔. 𝟔𝟏𝟑
𝑄 = 3,938,776.613 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟒𝟓. 𝟓𝟖𝟕𝟔𝟗𝟐𝟐𝟖
𝒔
August
For the month of August which has an average rainfall of 784.75 mm, determine the water volume
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 784.75 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (170,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 133,407,500 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 133,407,500 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 126,737,125 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 126,737,125 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟒, 𝟎𝟖𝟖, 𝟐𝟗𝟒. 𝟑𝟓𝟓
𝑄 = 4,088,294.355 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟒𝟕. 𝟑𝟏𝟖𝟐𝟐𝟏𝟕
𝒔
September
For the month of September which has an average rainfall of 388.8 mm, determine the water
volume in shaded area Vwsa using Eq. 1.2,
56 | P a g e
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 388.8 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (170,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 66,096,000 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 66,096,000 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 62,791,200 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 62,791,200 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟐, 𝟎𝟗𝟑, 𝟎𝟒𝟎
𝑄 = 2,093,040 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟐𝟒. 𝟐𝟐𝟓
𝒔
October
For the month of October which has an average rainfall of 448.1 mm, determine the water volume
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 448.1 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (170,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 76,177,000 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 76,177,000 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
57 | P a g e
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 72,368,150 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 72,368,150 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟐, 𝟑𝟑𝟒, 𝟒𝟓𝟔. 𝟒𝟓𝟐
𝑄 = 2,334,456.452 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟐𝟕. 𝟎𝟏𝟗𝟏𝟕𝟏𝟖𝟗
𝒔
November
For the month of November which has an average rainfall of 279.35 mm, determine the water
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 279.35 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (170,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 47,489,500 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 47,489,500 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)

𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 45,115,025 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 45,115,025 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟏, 𝟓𝟎𝟑, 𝟖𝟑𝟒. 𝟏𝟔𝟕
𝑄 = 1,503,834.167 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟏𝟕. 𝟒𝟎𝟓𝟒𝟖𝟖𝟎𝟒
𝒔
58 | P a g e
December
For the month of December which has an average rainfall of 85 mm, determine the water volume
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 85 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (170,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 14,450,000 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 14,450,000 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 13,727,500 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 13,727,500 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟒𝟒𝟐, 𝟖𝟐𝟐. 𝟓𝟖𝟎𝟔
𝑄 = 56,264.51613 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟓. 𝟏𝟐𝟓𝟐𝟔𝟏𝟑𝟓
𝒔
Calculating for the average flow rate,
0.18 + 0.42 + 0.65 + 4.26 + 12.61 + 19.19 + 45.59 + 47.32 + 24.23 + 27.02 + 17.41 + 5.13
𝑄𝑎𝑣𝑒 =
12
𝒎𝟑
𝑸𝒂𝒗𝒆 = 𝟏𝟔. 𝟗𝟗𝟖𝟗𝟕𝟒𝟑
𝒔
𝑚3 3600 𝑠 24 ℎ𝑟𝑠
𝑄𝑎𝑣𝑒 = 16.9989743 × ×
𝑠 ℎ𝑟 1 𝑑𝑎𝑦
𝒎𝟑
𝑸𝒂𝒗𝒆 = 𝟏, 𝟒𝟔𝟖, 𝟕𝟏𝟏. 𝟑𝟕𝟗
𝒅𝒂𝒚
59 | P a g e
The summarization of the data calculated is shown in table proceeded.
Table 3-1: First Location Calculation Summary

RAINFALL %EVA %SEE SHADED
MONTH (mm) (mm) (mm) AREA (m²) Vws (m²) Vwd (m²) Q (m³/s) Q (m³/day)
JANUARY 3 3 2 170000000 510,000 484500 0.180891577 15629.03226
FEBRUARY 6.25 3 2 170000000 1,062,500 1009375 0.417235036 36049.10714
MARCH 10.8 3 2 170000000 1,836,000 1744200 0.651209677 56264.51613
APRIL 68.4 3 2 170000000 11,628,000 11046600 4.261805556 368220
MAY 209.05 3 2 170000000 35,538,500 33761575 12.60512806 1089083.065
JUNE 308 3 2 170000000 52,360,000 49742000 19.19058642 1658066.667
JULY 756.05 3 2 170000000 128,528,500 122102075 45.58769228 3938776.613
AUGUST 784.75 3 2 170000000 133,407,500 126737125 47.3182217 4088294.355
SEPTEMBER 388.8 3 2 170000000 66,096,000 62791200 24.225 2093040
OCTOBER 448.1 3 2 170000000 76,177,000 72368150 27.01917189 2334456.452
NOVEMBER 279.35 3 2 170000000 47,489,500 45115025 17.40548804 1503834.167
DECEMBER 85 3 2 170000000 14,450,000 13727500 5.12526135 442822.5806
AVERAGE 278.9625 47,423,625 45052443.75 16.9989743 1468711.379
For the graphical representation of the data calculated,
5500000
4500000
3500000
2500000
1500000
500000
-500000
Average Flowrate per Day
Figure 3-1: Graphical Representation of Flow Rate per Day and Average Flow Rate in First
Proposed Location
60 | P a g e
3.1.1 Operational Hours per Day
For the first option, the operation hours per day for average demand is 14 hours.
Additionally, the operational hours per day for peak demand is 10 hours. Determining the required
flow rate for average and peak demand,
𝑚3 14 ℎ𝑟𝑠 10 ℎ𝑟𝑠
𝑄𝑎𝑣𝑒 ( )= (𝑄1 ) + (𝑄2 )
𝑑𝑎𝑦 𝑑𝑎𝑦 𝑑𝑎𝑦
Where Qave in m3/day is 1,468,711.379 m3/day. Substituting,
1,468,711.379 = (𝑄1 ) + (𝑄2 )
1,468,711.379𝑚3 = 14 ℎ𝑟𝑠(𝑄1 ) + 10 ℎ𝑟𝑠(𝑄2 )
The head must be equal whether it is based on average or peak demand. From this
statement, the designers can use the Eq.1.6 for making relationships for the first equation.
′ ′
𝑃𝑡1 = 𝑄1 × 𝛾 × 𝐻𝑁1 ; 𝑃𝑡2 = 𝑄2 × 𝛾 × 𝐻𝑁2
′ ′
Where 𝐻𝑁1 = 𝐻𝑁2 = 𝐻𝑁′ ,
𝑃𝑡1 𝑃𝑡2
𝐻𝑁′ = =
𝑄1 × 𝛾 𝑄2 × 𝛾
𝑃𝑡1 𝑃𝑡2
=
𝑄1 𝑄2
Solving for Q2,
𝑃𝑡2
𝑄2 = 𝑄1 ( )
𝑃𝑡1
52,290.7832 𝑘𝑊
𝑄2 = 𝑄1 ( )
32,833.74759 𝑘𝑊
𝑄2 = 1.592592593(𝑄1 )
Substituting this value to the first equation,
1,468,711.379𝑚3 = 14 ℎ𝑟𝑠(𝑄1 ) + 10 ℎ𝑟𝑠(1.592592593 (𝑄1 ))
1,468,711.379𝑚3 = 14 ℎ𝑟𝑠(𝑄1 ) + 15.92592593 ℎ𝑟𝑠(𝑄1 )
61 | P a g e
Solving for Q1,
1,468,711.379 𝑚3 = 𝑄1 (14 ℎ𝑟𝑠 + 15.92592593 ℎ𝑟𝑠)
1,468,711.379𝑚3 𝑚3 1 ℎ𝑟
𝑄1 = = 49,078.22679 ×
(14 + 15.92592593)ℎ𝑟𝑠 ℎ𝑟 3600 𝑠
𝒎𝟑
𝑸𝟏 = 𝟏𝟑. 𝟔𝟑𝟐𝟖𝟒𝟎𝟕𝟕
𝒔
Solving for Q2,
𝑄2 = 1.592592593(𝑄1 )
𝑚3
𝑄2 = 1.592592593 (13.63284077 )
𝑠
𝒎𝟑
𝑸𝟐 = 𝟐𝟏. 𝟕𝟏𝟏𝟓𝟔𝟏𝟐𝟑
𝒔
Thus, the head of the hydroelectric power plant, which is based on 1st location and option,
is,
𝑃𝑡1
𝐻𝑁′ =
𝑄1 × 𝛾
𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚
32,833.74759
𝐻𝑁′ = 𝑠
𝑚3 𝑘𝑁
13.63284077 × 9.81 3
𝑠 𝑚
𝑯′𝑵 = 𝟐𝟒𝟓. 𝟓𝟏 𝒎 ≈ 𝟐𝟒𝟔 𝒎
For Checking,
𝑃𝑡2
𝐻𝑁′ =
𝑄1 × 𝛾
𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚
52,290.7832
𝐻𝑁′ = 𝑠
𝑚3 𝑘𝑁
13.63284077 × 9.81 3
𝑠 𝑚
𝑯′𝑵 = 𝟐𝟒𝟓. 𝟓𝟏 𝒎 ≈ 𝟐𝟒𝟔 𝒎
The checking confirms the value that the designers calculated are correct.
62 | P a g e
3.1.1.1 Penstock Design
For the penstock design, the designers assumed for the penstock efficiency (η p) and
friction factor (f). The chosen material is C1020 steel (normalized) which has a yield strength of
50,000 Psi. The table below shows the summary of the variables needed to design the penstock.
Table 3-2: Values for Penstock Design

Variables Values
Penstock Efficiency (ηp) 50%
Friction Factor (f) 0.002
C1020 Steel (Normalized) Yield Strength (Sy) 50,000 Psi
For the actual head of water in turbine (Hn’), use Eq. 1.7.
𝐻𝑁′
𝜂𝑝 = × 100
𝐻𝑁
𝐻𝑁′ = 𝜂𝑝 (𝐻𝑁 )
𝐻𝑁′ = 0.50 (246 𝑚)
𝑯′𝑵 = 𝟏𝟐𝟑 𝒎
Determining the head due to friction (Hf), use Eq. 1.11.
𝐻𝑓 = 𝐻𝑁 − 𝐻𝑛 ′
𝐻𝑓 = 246 𝑚 − 123 𝑚
𝑯𝒇 = 𝟏𝟐𝟑 𝒎
Determining the water velocity, use Eq. 1.8.
𝑉𝑡′ = √2𝑔(𝐻𝑁′ )
𝑚
𝑉𝑡′ = √2 × 9.81 × 123 𝑚
𝑠2
𝒎
𝑽′𝒕 = 𝟒𝟗. 𝟏𝟐𝟒𝟗𝟒𝟐𝟕𝟓
𝒔
63 | P a g e
Determining the diameter of penstock (Dp), use Eq. 1.9.

2
𝜋(𝐷𝑝 )
𝑄= × 𝑉𝑡 ′
4
4𝑄
𝐷𝑝 = √
𝜋 (𝑉𝑡′ )
4 × 16.9989743 𝑚3 /𝑠
𝐷𝑝 = √
𝜋 (49.12494275 𝑚/𝑠)
𝑫𝒑 = 𝟎. 𝟔𝟔𝟑𝟕𝟔𝟔𝟓𝟗𝟏 𝒎
Penstock should have at least less than 1 meter of penstock for easy installation and
manufacturability. If the calculated diameter is greater than 1 m, add one more penstock to the
hydroelectric power plant. The calculated penstock which has a value of 0.663766591 m is less
than 1 m, thus, there is no more need of additional penstock.
Determining the length of penstock, use the Eq. 1.12.
𝑓 × 𝐿𝑝 × (𝑉𝑡′ )2
𝐻𝑓 =
2𝑔𝐷𝑝
2 × 𝑔 × 𝐻𝑓 × 𝐷𝑝
𝐿𝑝 =
𝑓(𝑉𝑡′ )2
𝑚
2 × 9.81 × 123 𝑚 × 0.663766591 𝑚
𝐿𝑝 = 𝑠2
𝑚2
0.002 (49.12494275)2 2
𝑠
𝑳𝒑 = 𝟑𝟑𝟏. 𝟖𝟖𝟑𝟐𝟗𝟓𝟒 𝒎
The length of penstock should be greater than the calculated head of water (H N). The
calculated head of water is 246 m which is less than the length of penstock. Thus, the length of
penstock (Lp) is greater than the head of water (HN) which is acceptable.
Determining the inclination angle of penstock (θ), use Eq. 1.13.
𝐻𝑁
𝜃 = sin−1 ( )
𝐿𝑝
64 | P a g e
246
𝜃 = sin−1 ( )
331.8832954
𝜽 = 𝟒𝟕. 𝟖𝟑𝟓𝟖𝟐𝟏𝟐𝟕°
The angle of inclination should be greater than 45˚. The computed angle of inclination is
47.83582127˚ which is greater than 45˚ which is acceptable.
Determining the hydrostatic pressure in turbine (PW),
𝑃𝑤 = 𝛾 × 𝐻𝑁′
𝑘𝑁
𝑃𝑤 = 9.81 × 123 𝑚
𝑚3
𝑷𝒘 = 𝟏, 𝟐𝟎𝟔. 𝟔𝟑 𝒌𝑷𝒂 = 𝟏𝟕𝟓. 𝟎𝟓𝟓𝟏𝟐𝟗𝟓 𝑷𝒔𝒊
Determining the thickness of penstock, use Eq. 1.14. The factor of safety is 3 for repeated,
one direction and mild shock (Refer to page 20, Design of Machine Elements by Faires, Table 1.1).
𝑡𝑝 =
2 × 𝑆𝑑
𝑙𝑏
175.0551295 × 0.663766591 𝑚
𝑡𝑝 = 𝑖𝑛2
𝑙𝑏
5000 2
2× 𝑖𝑛
3
𝑡𝑝 = 0.003485872 𝑚
𝒕𝒑 = 𝟎. 𝟏𝟑𝟕𝟐𝟑𝟗𝟎𝟕𝟏 𝒊𝒏
The thickness of penstock should be equal to or less than 0.25 inch thick. The calculated
thickness is 0.137239071 in which is less than 0.25 inch, thus, the design is acceptable.
3.1.1.2 Surge Tank Design
The surge tank computation shall be based from the penstock design. The material that
will be used for surge tank is C1020 Steel (Normalized). It has a yield strength of 42,000 Psi (see
Appendix 16). For the Factor of Safety (F.S.), the designers assumed that the kind of load
contained in surge tank is a shock load which has a range of F.S. of 5 – 7 (see Appendix 15, Table
5-8) based on yield strength. The designers choose 7 as a Factor of Safety for the design of surge
tank. The list of inputs for the computation of surge tank specifications are shown in Table 3-3.
65 | P a g e
Table 3-3: Surge Tank Design Given Values

SURGE TANK DESIGN GIVEN VALUES
Given Values
Length of Penstock (Lp) 331.8832954 m

Head due to Friction (Hf) 123 m
Net Head (HN) 246 m
Penstock Diameter (Dp) 0.663766591 m
Angle of Inclination (ϴ) 47.83582127˚
Surge Tank Material C1020 Steel (Annealed)
Yield Strength (Sy) 42,000 Psi
Factor of Safety (F.S.) 7
%Allowance 10%
Determining the length due to friction, use Eq. 1.16.
𝐻𝑁 𝐻𝑓
sin 𝜃 = =
𝐿𝑝 𝐿𝑓
𝐻𝑓 × 𝐿𝑝
𝐿𝑓 =
𝐻𝑁
(123 𝑚)(331.8832954 𝑚)
𝐿𝑓 =
246 𝑚
𝑳𝒇 = 𝟏𝟔𝟓. 𝟗𝟒𝟏𝟔𝟒𝟕𝟕 𝒎
Then, solve for the volume of water at the length due to friction by using Eq. 1.17.
2
𝜋(𝐷𝑝 ) (𝐿𝑓 )
𝑉𝑤𝑝 =
4
𝜋(0.663766591 𝑚)2 (165.9416477 𝑚)

𝑉𝑤𝑝 =
4
𝑽𝒘𝒑 = 𝟓𝟕. 𝟒𝟐𝟏𝟕𝟎𝟏𝟔𝟏 𝒎𝟑
After that, solve for the volume of surge tank by using the Eq. 1.18.
66 | P a g e
𝑉𝑆𝑇 = (1 + 𝑎𝑙𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒)(𝑉𝑤𝑝 )
𝑉𝑆𝑇 = (1 + 0.10)(57.42170161 𝑚3 )
𝑽𝑺𝑻 = 𝟔𝟑. 𝟏𝟔𝟑𝟖𝟕𝟏𝟕𝟕 𝒎𝟑
Substituting the value of VST to Eq. 1.19 to solve for the diameter of surge tank,
𝑉𝑆𝑇 =
4
Where 𝐻𝑆𝑇 = 3(𝐷𝑆𝑇 ) (Eq. 1.20),
𝜋(𝐷𝑆𝑇 )2 (3 𝐷𝑆𝑇 )
𝑉𝑆𝑇 =
4
3𝜋(𝐷𝑆𝑇 )3
𝑉𝑆𝑇 =
4
3 4 (𝑉𝑆𝑇 )
𝐷𝑆𝑇 = √
3𝜋
3 4 (63.16387177 𝑚3 )
𝐷𝑆𝑇 = √
3𝜋
𝑫𝑺𝑻 = 𝟐. 𝟗𝟗𝟐𝟖𝟐𝟑𝟓𝟐 𝒎
Substituting the DST to the Eq. 1.20,
𝐻𝑆𝑇 = 3(2.99282352 𝑚)
𝑯𝑺𝑻 = 𝟖. 𝟗𝟕𝟖𝟒𝟕𝟎𝟓𝟓𝟗 𝒎
Then, determining the pressure at bottom of the surge tank by using Eq. 1.21,
𝑃𝑏 = 𝛾 × 𝐻𝑆𝑇
𝑘𝑁
𝑃𝑏 = 9.81 × 8.97847056 𝑚
𝑚3
𝑷𝒃 = 𝟖𝟖. 𝟎𝟕𝟖𝟕𝟗𝟔𝟏𝟖 𝒌𝑷𝒂
𝑷𝒃 = 𝟏𝟐. 𝟕𝟕𝟖𝟐𝟕𝟎𝟗𝟓 𝑷𝒔𝒊
67 | P a g e
Then, determine the centroidal pressure in the surge tank by using Eq. 1.22.
2
𝑃𝑐 = (12.77827095 𝑃𝑠𝑖)
3
𝑷𝒄 = 𝟖. 𝟓𝟏𝟖𝟖𝟒𝟕𝟐𝟗𝟗 𝑷𝒔𝒊
Next, determine the thickness of the surge tank by using the Eq. 1.23. The material that
the designers will use for the surge tank is C1020 Steel (Annealed) which has a yield strength of
42,000 Psi.
𝑡𝑆𝑇 =
2(𝑆𝑑 )
8.518847299 𝑃𝑠𝑖 (2.99282352 𝑚)

𝑡𝑆𝑇 =
42000 𝑃𝑠𝑖
2( )
7
𝑡𝑆𝑇 = 0.002124617 𝑚
𝒕𝑺𝑻 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟖𝟑𝟔𝟒𝟔𝟑𝟒𝟕 𝒊𝒏
For the final part, determine the thickness of surge tank at the bottom part.
𝑃𝑏 (𝐷𝑆𝑇 )
𝑡𝐵𝑆𝑇 =
4(𝑆𝑑 )
12.77827095 𝑃𝑠𝑖 (2.99282352 𝑚)

𝑡𝐵𝑆𝑇 =
42000 𝑃𝑠𝑖
4( )
7
𝑡𝐵𝑆𝑇 = 0.001593463 𝑚
𝒕𝑩𝑺𝑻 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟔𝟐𝟕𝟑𝟒𝟕𝟔 𝒊𝒏
3.1.1.3 Water Dam Design
Water dam shall be designed which is based on the computed net head (H N). The
designers shall assume the values of the bottom width (W1), top width (W2), water dam height (HD),
water dam length (LD), height of water in dam (HW) and soil bearing pressure (Sb) which has a
range of 1,000 to 3,000 psf. The succeeding table shows the list of the values needed to design the
water dam.
68 | P a g e
Table 3-4 Water Dam Surge Tank Design Given Values

Given Values
Bottom Width (W1) 360 m 1,180.80 ft

Top Width (W2) 120 m 393.60 ft
Water Dam Height (HD) 400 m 1,312 ft
Water Dam Length 300 m 984 ft
Height of Water in Dam (HW) 370 m 1,213.60 ft
Soil Bearing Pressure (Sb) 3000 Psi 432,000 psf
Density of Concrete 135 lb/ft³
Density of Water 62.4 lb/ft³
Solving for the weight of dam (WD), use Eq. 1.24.
𝑊1 + 𝑊2
𝑊𝐷 = ( ) (𝐿𝐷 )(𝐻𝐷 )(𝜌𝑐 )
2
1180.8 + 393.6 𝑙𝑏
𝑊𝐷 = ( ) 𝑓𝑡 (984 𝑓𝑡)(1312 𝑓𝑡) (135 3 )
2 𝑓𝑡
𝑾𝑫 = 𝟏𝟑𝟕, 𝟏𝟗𝟖, 𝟎𝟎𝟐, 𝟏𝟕𝟔 𝒍𝒃𝒔
Solving for weight of water in dam, use Eq. 1.25.
𝑃𝑤 = 𝐴𝑤 × 𝐿𝑑 × 𝜌𝑤
69 | P a g e
Where:
𝑐 × 𝐻𝑊 𝑊1 − 𝑊2
𝐴𝑤 = 0.5 × 𝐻𝑊 × 𝑥; 𝑥= ; 𝑐=
𝐻𝑑 2
First, solve for c;
1180.8 𝑓𝑡 − 393.6 𝑓𝑡
𝑐=
2
𝒄 = 𝟑𝟗𝟑. 𝟔 𝒇𝒕
Calculating the x;
393.6 𝑓𝑡 × 1213.6 𝑓𝑡
𝑥=
1312 𝑓𝑡
𝒙 = 𝟑𝟔𝟒. 𝟎𝟖 𝒇𝒕
Then, solving for the Area of water in dam (AW);
𝐴𝑤 = 0.5 × 1213.6 𝑓𝑡 × 364.08 𝑓𝑡
𝑨𝒘 = 𝟐𝟐𝟎, 𝟗𝟐𝟒 𝒇𝒕𝟐
Determining the weight of water in dam (PW);
𝑙𝑏
𝑃𝑤 = 220924 𝑓𝑡 2 × 984 𝑓𝑡 × 62.4
𝑓𝑡 3
𝑷𝒘 = 𝟏𝟑, 𝟓𝟔𝟓, 𝟎𝟕𝟏, 𝟑𝟓𝟗. 𝟓𝟗𝟎𝟒 𝒍𝒃𝒔
Next, solve for the total weight of dam (Wt) by using the Eq. 1.26;
𝑊𝑡 = 𝑊𝐷 + 𝑃𝑤
𝑊𝑡 = 137,198,002,176 𝑙𝑏𝑠 + 13,565,071,359.5904 𝑙𝑏𝑠
𝑾𝒕 = 𝟏𝟓𝟎, 𝟕𝟔𝟑, 𝟎𝟕𝟑, 𝟓𝟑𝟓. 𝟓𝟗 𝒍𝒃𝒔
Solving for the Factor of Safety due to Sinking (FSS) by using Eq. 1.27. The FSS should
be from the range of 3 – 5.
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑆. = ; 𝐴𝑏 = 𝐿𝑑 × 𝑊1
𝑊𝑡
70 | P a g e
𝑆𝑏 × 𝐿𝑑 × 𝑊1
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑆. =
𝑊𝑡
𝑙𝑏
432,000 × 984 𝑓𝑡 × 1,180.80 𝑓𝑡
𝑓𝑡 3
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑆. =
150,763,073,535.59 𝑙𝑏𝑠
𝑭. 𝑺. 𝑺. = 𝟑. 𝟑𝟐𝟗𝟑𝟓𝟔
The computed FSS is within the range; thus, the assumed values are correct. Next,
determining the hydrostatic force (PH);
𝑃𝐻 = (0.5𝐻𝑤 ) × 𝜌𝑤 × 𝐻𝑤 × 𝐿𝐷
𝑙𝑏
𝑃𝐻 = (0.5 × 1213.6 𝑓𝑡) × 62.4 × 1213.6 𝑓𝑡 × 984 𝑓𝑡
𝑓𝑡 3
𝑷𝑯 = 𝟏𝟕, 𝟖𝟗𝟎, 𝟕𝟖𝟖, 𝟖𝟔𝟒 𝒍𝒃𝒔
Determining the factor of safety due to overturning (FSO) by using the Eq. 1.28. FSO
should be within the range of 3 – 5.
𝑊1
𝑊𝐷 ( ) + 𝑃𝑤 (𝑊1 − 𝑥 ′ )
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑂. = 2
𝐻
𝑃𝐻 ( 𝑤 )
2
Where:
𝑥
𝑥′ =
3
364.08 𝑓𝑡
𝑥′ =
3
𝑥 ′ = 121.36 𝑓𝑡
Substituting the x’ to the FSO equation,
1180.8 𝑓𝑡
137,198,002,176 𝑙𝑏𝑠 ( ) + 13,565,071,359.5904 𝑙𝑏𝑠 (1180.8 − 121.36)𝑓𝑡
2
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑂. =
1213.6 𝑓𝑡
45,216,904,532 𝑙𝑏𝑠 ( )
2
𝑭. 𝑺. 𝑶. = 𝟑. 𝟒𝟕𝟓𝟗𝟗𝟕
71 | P a g e
The computed FSO is within the range; thus, making the assume values correct. Solve for
the coefficient of friction (μ) by using the Eq. 1.29. Coefficient of friction shall be a value of greater
than 1.
𝜇(𝑊𝑡 )
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝐿. 𝐷. =
𝑃𝐻
Where:
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑆. = 𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑂. = 𝐹. 𝑆. 𝐿. 𝐷. ≈ 4
𝜇 (𝑊𝑡 )
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝐿. 𝐷. =
𝑃𝐻
(𝐹. 𝑆. 𝐿. 𝐷. )(𝑃𝐻 )
𝜇=
𝑊𝑡
(4)(45,216,904,531.968 𝑙𝑏𝑠)
𝜇=
150,763,073,535,59 𝑙𝑏𝑠
𝝁 = 𝟏. 𝟏𝟗𝟗𝟔𝟖𝟏𝟏𝟓𝟓
The computed coefficient of friction (μ) is greater than 1; thus, the assumed values are
correct.
3.2 Second Proposed Location
The first proposed location is located in Socorro, Oriental Mindoro near in a river. From the
Table 1-4, the shaded area around the location is 9000 hectares. The designers’ assumption for
%seepage and %evaporation is 2 and 3, respectively. First, convert the hectares to square meter.
10,000 𝑚2
9000 ℎ𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑠 × = 90,000,000 𝑚2
January
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 3 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (90,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 270,000.00 𝑚3
72 | P a g e
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 270,000 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 256,500 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 256,500 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟖𝟐𝟕𝟒. 𝟏𝟗𝟑𝟓𝟒𝟖
𝑄 = 8274.193548 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟗𝟓𝟕𝟔𝟔𝟏𝟐𝟗
𝒔
February
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 6.25 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (90,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 562,500 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 562,500 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 534,375 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 534,375 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟏𝟗𝟎𝟖𝟒. 𝟖𝟐𝟏𝟒𝟑
73 | P a g e
𝑄 = 19084.82143 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟎. 𝟐𝟐𝟎𝟖𝟖𝟗𝟏𝟑𝟕
𝒔
March
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 10.8 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (90,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 972,000 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 972,000 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 923,400 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 923,400 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟐𝟗𝟕𝟖𝟕. 𝟎𝟗𝟔𝟕𝟕
𝑄 = 29787.09677 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟎. 𝟑𝟒𝟒𝟕𝟓𝟖𝟎𝟔𝟓
𝒔
April
74 | P a g e
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 68.4 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (90,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 6,156,000 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 6,156,000 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 5,848,200 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 5,848,200 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟏𝟗𝟒𝟗𝟒𝟎
𝑄 = 194940 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟐. 𝟐𝟓𝟔𝟐𝟓
𝒔
May
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 209.05 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (90,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 18,814,500 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 18,814,500 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 17,873,775 𝑚3
75 | P a g e
𝑉𝑊𝐷 17,873,775 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟓𝟕𝟔𝟓𝟕𝟑. 𝟑𝟖𝟕𝟏
𝑄 = 576573.3871 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟔. 𝟔𝟕𝟑𝟑𝟎𝟑𝟎𝟗𝟏
𝒔
June
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 308 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (90,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 27,720,000 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 27,720,000 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 26,334,000 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 26,334,000 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟖𝟕𝟕𝟖𝟎𝟎
𝑄 = 877800 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟏𝟎. 𝟏𝟓𝟗𝟕𝟐𝟐𝟐𝟐
𝒔
76 | P a g e
July
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 756.05 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (90,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 68,044,500 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 68,044,500 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 64,642,275 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 64,642,275 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟐𝟎𝟖𝟓𝟐𝟑𝟒. 𝟔𝟕𝟕
𝑄 = 2085234.677 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟐𝟒. 𝟏𝟑𝟒𝟔𝟔𝟎𝟔𝟐
𝒔
August
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 784.75 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (90,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 70,627,500 𝑚3
77 | P a g e
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 70,627,500 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 67,096,125 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 67,096,125 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟐𝟏𝟔𝟒𝟑𝟗𝟏. 𝟏𝟐𝟗
𝑄 = 2164391.129 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟐𝟓. 𝟎𝟓𝟎𝟖𝟐𝟑𝟐𝟓
𝒔
September
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 388.8 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (90,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 34,992,000 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 34,992,000 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 33,242,400 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 33,242,400 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟏𝟏𝟎𝟖𝟎𝟖𝟎
78 | P a g e
𝑄 = 1108080 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟏𝟐. 𝟖𝟐𝟓
𝒔
October
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 448.1 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (90,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 40,329,000 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 40,329,000 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 38,312,550 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 38,312,550 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟏𝟐𝟑𝟓𝟖𝟖𝟖. 𝟕𝟏
𝑄 = 𝟏𝟐𝟑𝟓𝟖𝟖𝟖. 𝟕𝟏 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟏𝟒. 𝟑𝟎𝟒𝟐𝟔𝟕𝟒𝟕
𝒔
November
79 | P a g e
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 279.35 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (90,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 25,141,500 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 25,141,500 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 23,884,425 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 23,884,425 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟕𝟗𝟔𝟏𝟒𝟕. 𝟓
𝑄 = 796147.5 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟗. 𝟐𝟏𝟒𝟔𝟕𝟎𝟏𝟑𝟗
𝒔
December
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 85 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (90,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 7,650,000 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 7,650,000 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 7,267,500 𝑚3
80 | P a g e
𝑉𝑊𝐷 7,267,500 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟐𝟑𝟒𝟒𝟑𝟓. 𝟒𝟖𝟑𝟗
𝑄 = 234435.4839 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟐. 𝟕𝟏𝟑𝟑𝟕𝟑𝟔𝟓𝟔
𝒔
0.1 + 0.22 + 0.34 + 2.26 + 6.67 + 10.16 + 24.14 + 25.05 + 12.83 + 14.30 + 9.21 + 2.71
𝑄𝑎𝑣𝑒 =
12
𝒎𝟑
𝑸𝒂𝒗𝒆 = 𝟖. 𝟗𝟗𝟗𝟒𝟓𝟔𝟗𝟖𝟐
𝒔
𝑚3 3600 𝑠 24 ℎ𝑟𝑠
𝑄𝑎𝑣𝑒 = 8.999456982 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸𝒂𝒗𝒆 = 𝟕𝟕𝟕𝟓𝟓𝟑. 𝟎𝟖𝟑𝟐
𝒅𝒂𝒚
81 | P a g e
The summary of the calculations for the second proposed location is shown in table below.
Table 3-5: Second Proposed Location Calculations Summary

SHADED
RAINFALL %EVA %SEE AREA
MONTH (mm) (mm) (mm) (m²) Vws (m²) Vwd (m²) Q (m³/s) Q (m³/day)
JANUARY 3 3 2 90000000 270,000 256500 0.095766129 8274.193548
FEBRUARY 6.25 3 2 90000000 562,500 534375 0.220889137 19084.82143
MARCH 10.8 3 2 90000000 972,000 923400 0.344758065 29787.09677
APRIL 68.4 3 2 90000000 6,156,000 5848200 2.25625 194940
MAY 209.05 3 2 90000000 18,814,500 17873775 6.673303091 576573.3871
JUNE 308 3 2 90000000 27,720,000 26334000 10.15972222 877800
JULY 756.05 3 2 90000000 68,044,500 64642275 24.13466062 2085234.677
AUGUST 784.75 3 2 90000000 70,627,500 67096125 25.05082325 2164391.129
SEPTEMBER 388.8 3 2 90000000 34,992,000 33242400 12.825 1108080
OCTOBER 448.1 3 2 90000000 40,329,000 38312550 14.30426747 1235888.71
NOVEMBER 279.35 3 2 90000000 23,884,425 23884425 9.214670139 796147.5
DECEMBER 85 3 2 90000000 7,650,000 7267500 2.713373656 234435.4839
AVERAGE 278.9625 25,001,868.75 23851293.75 8.999456982 777553.0832
For the graphical representation of the data calculated,
5500000
4500000
3500000
2500000
1500000
500000
-500000
Figure 3-2: Graphical Representation of the Flow Rate per Day and Average Flow rate in Second
Proposed Location
82 | P a g e
For the third option, the operation hours per day for average demand is 18 hours.
6flow rate for average and peak demand,
𝑄𝑎𝑣𝑒 ( )= (𝑄1 ) + (𝑄2 )
Where Qave in m3/day is 777,553.0832 m3/day. Substituting,
777,553.0832 = (𝑄1 ) + (𝑄2 )
777,553.0832 𝑚3 = 18 ℎ𝑟𝑠(𝑄1 ) + 6 ℎ𝑟𝑠(𝑄2 )
′ ′
𝑃𝑡1 = 𝑄1 × 𝛾 × 𝐻𝑁1 ; 𝑃𝑡2 = 𝑄2 × 𝛾 × 𝐻𝑁2
′ ′
𝑃𝑡1 𝑃𝑡2
𝐻𝑁′ = =
𝑄1 × 𝛾 𝑄2 × 𝛾
𝑃𝑡1 𝑃𝑡2
=
𝑄1 𝑄2
Solving for Q2,
𝑃𝑡2
𝑄2 = 𝑄1 ( )
𝑃𝑡1
52,290.7832 𝑘𝑊
𝑄2 = 𝑄1 ( )
32,833.74759 𝑘𝑊
𝑄2 = 1.592592593(𝑄1 )
777,553.0832 𝑚3 = 18 ℎ𝑟𝑠(𝑄1 ) + 6 ℎ𝑟𝑠(1.592592593 (𝑄1 ))
777,553.0832 𝑚3 = 18 ℎ𝑟𝑠(𝑄1 ) + 9.555555556 ℎ𝑟𝑠(𝑄1 )
83 | P a g e
Solving for Q1,
777,553.0832 𝑚3 = 𝑄1 (18 ℎ𝑟𝑠 + 9.555555556 ℎ𝑟𝑠)
777,553.0832 𝑚3 𝑚3 1 ℎ𝑟
𝑄1 = = 28,217.65221 ×
(18 + 9.555555556)ℎ𝑟𝑠 ℎ𝑟 3600 𝑠
𝒎𝟑
𝑸𝟏 = 𝟕. 𝟖𝟑𝟖𝟐𝟑𝟔𝟕𝟐𝟔
𝒔
Solving for Q2,
𝑄2 = 1.592592593(𝑄1 )
𝑚3
𝑄2 = 1.592592593 (7.838236726 )
𝑠
𝒎𝟑
𝑸𝟐 = 𝟏𝟐. 𝟒𝟖𝟑𝟏𝟏𝟕𝟕𝟓
𝒔
Thus, the head of the hydroelectric power plant, which is based on 3 rd location and option,
is,
𝑃𝑡1
𝐻𝑁′ =
𝑄1 × 𝛾
𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚
32,833.74759
𝐻𝑁′ = 𝑠
𝑚3 𝑘𝑁
7.838236726 × 9.81 3
𝑠 𝑚
𝑯′𝑵 = 𝟒𝟐𝟕. 𝟎𝟎𝟓𝟏𝟎𝟗𝟗 𝒎 ≈ 𝟒𝟐𝟖 𝒎
For Checking,
𝑃𝑡2
𝐻𝑁′ =
𝑄1 × 𝛾
𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚
52,290.7832
𝐻𝑁′ = 𝑠
𝑚3 𝑘𝑁
12.48311775 × 9.81 3
𝑠 𝑚
𝑯′𝑵 = 𝟒𝟐𝟕. 𝟎𝟎𝟓𝟏𝟎𝟗𝟗 𝒎 ≈ 𝟒𝟐𝟖 𝒎
The checking confirms the value that the designers’ calculations are correct.
84 | P a g e

Variables Values

𝐻𝑁′
𝜂𝑝 = × 100
𝐻𝑁
𝐻𝑁′ = 0.7 (428 𝑚)

𝑯′𝑵 = 𝟐𝟗𝟗. 𝟔𝟎 𝒎
𝐻𝑓 = 428 𝑚 − 299.60 𝑚
𝑯𝒇 = 𝟏𝟐𝟖. 𝟒𝟎 𝒎
𝑉𝑡′ = √2𝑔(𝐻𝑁′ )
𝑚
𝑉𝑡′ = √2 × 9.81 × 299.60 𝑚
𝑠2
𝒎
𝑽′𝒕 = 𝟕𝟔. 𝟔𝟔𝟗𝟏𝟎𝟕𝟐𝟏
𝒔
85 | P a g e

2
𝜋(𝐷𝑝 )
𝑄= × 𝑉𝑡 ′
4
4𝑄
𝐷𝑝 = √
𝜋 (𝑉𝑡′ )
4 × 8.999456982 𝑚3 /𝑠
𝐷𝑝 = √
𝜋 (76.66910721 𝑚/𝑠)
𝑫𝒑 = 𝟎. 𝟑𝟖𝟔𝟓𝟗𝟐𝟏𝟑 𝒎
hydroelectric power plant. The calculated penstock which has a value of 0.38659213 m is less than
1 m, thus, there is no more need of additional penstock.
𝑓 × 𝐿𝑝 × (𝑉𝑡′ )2
𝐻𝑓 =
2𝑔𝐷𝑝
2 × 𝑔 × 𝐻𝑓 × 𝐷𝑝
𝐿𝑝 =
𝑓(𝑉𝑡′ )2
𝑚
2 × 9.81 × 128.40 𝑚 × 0.38659213 𝑚
𝐿𝑝 = 𝑠2
𝑚2
0.002 (76.66910721)2 2
𝑠
𝑳𝒑 = 𝟖𝟐. 𝟖𝟒𝟏𝟏𝟕𝟎𝟕𝟕 𝒎
calculated head of water is 428 m which is greater than the length of penstock. Thus, the length of
penstock (Lp) is less than the head of water (HN) which is not acceptable.
86 | P a g e
Table 3-7 Surge Tank Design Values

Given Values

Head due to Friction (Hf) 128.40 m
Net Head (HN) 428 m
Angle of Inclination (ϴ) N/A
%Allowance 10%
𝐻𝑁 𝐻𝑓
sin 𝜃 = =
𝐿𝑝 𝐿𝑓
𝐿𝑓 =
𝐻𝑁
(128.40 𝑚)(82.84117077 𝑚)
𝐿𝑓 =
428 𝑚
𝑳𝒇 = 𝟐𝟒. 𝟖𝟓𝟐𝟑𝟓𝟏𝟐𝟑 𝒎
2
𝑉𝑤𝑝 =
4
87 | P a g e
𝜋(0.38659213 𝑚)2 (24.85235123 𝑚)

𝑉𝑤𝑝 =
4
𝑽𝒘𝒑 = 𝟐. 𝟗𝟏𝟕𝟏𝟖𝟏𝟎𝟑𝟗 𝒎𝟑
𝑉𝑆𝑇 = (1 + 0.10)(2.917181039 𝑚3 )
𝑽𝑺𝑻 = 𝟑. 𝟐𝟎𝟖𝟖𝟗𝟗𝟏𝟒𝟑 𝒎𝟑
𝑉𝑆𝑇 =
4
𝑉𝑆𝑇 =
4
𝑉𝑆𝑇 =
4
3 4 (𝑉𝑆𝑇 )
𝐷𝑆𝑇 = √
3𝜋
3 4 (3.208899143 𝑚3 )
𝐷𝑆𝑇 = √
3𝜋
𝑫𝑺𝑻 = 𝟏. 𝟏𝟎𝟖𝟒𝟒𝟓𝟗𝟕𝟑 𝒎
𝐻𝑆𝑇 = 3(1.108445973 𝑚)
𝑯𝑺𝑻 = 𝟑. 𝟑𝟐𝟓𝟑𝟑𝟕𝟗𝟏𝟗 𝒎
88 | P a g e
𝑘𝑁
𝑃𝑏 = 9.81 × 3.3253379 𝑚
𝑚3
𝑷𝒃 = 𝟑𝟐. 𝟔𝟐𝟏𝟓𝟔𝟒𝟗𝟖 𝒌𝑷𝒂
𝑷𝒃 = 𝟒. 𝟕𝟑𝟐𝟔𝟔𝟐𝟐𝟕𝟕 𝑷𝒔𝒊
2
𝑃𝑐 = (4.732662277 𝑃𝑠𝑖)
3
𝑷𝒄 = 𝟑. 𝟏𝟓𝟓𝟏𝟎𝟖𝟏𝟖𝟓 𝑷𝒔𝒊
42,000 Psi.
𝑡𝑆𝑇 =
2(𝑆𝑑 )
3.155108185 𝑃𝑠𝑖 (1.108445973 𝑚)

𝑡𝑆𝑇 =
42000 𝑃𝑠𝑖
2( )
7
𝑡𝑆𝑇 = 0.000291439 𝑚
𝒕𝑺𝑻 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟏𝟏𝟒𝟕𝟑𝟗𝟕𝟑 𝒊𝒏
𝑡𝐵𝑆𝑇 =
4(𝑆𝑑 )
4.732662277 𝑃𝑠𝑖 (1.108445973 𝑚)

𝑡𝐵𝑆𝑇 =
42000 𝑃𝑠𝑖
4( )
7
𝑡𝐵𝑆𝑇 = 0.000218579 𝑚
𝒕𝑩𝑺𝑻 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟎𝟖𝟔𝟎𝟓𝟒𝟖 𝒊𝒏
89 | P a g e
Water dam shall be designed which is based on the computed net head (HN). The
water dam.
Table 3-8 Water Dam Surge Tank Design

Given Values
Bottom Width (W1) 450 m 1476 ft

Water Dam Height (HD) 500 m 1,640 ft
Height of Water in Dam (HW) 450 m 1,476 ft
𝑊1 + 𝑊2
𝑊𝐷 = ( ) (𝐿𝐷 )(𝐻𝐷 )(𝜌𝑐 )
2
1476 + 196.8 𝑙𝑏
𝑊𝐷 = ( ) 𝑓𝑡 (984 𝑓𝑡)(1640 𝑓𝑡) (135 3 )
2 𝑓𝑡
𝑾𝑫 = 𝟏𝟖𝟐, 𝟐𝟏𝟔, 𝟎𝟗𝟔, 𝟔𝟒𝟎 𝒍𝒃𝒔
90 | P a g e
Where:
𝑐 × 𝐻𝑊 𝑊1 − 𝑊2
𝐴𝑤 = 0.5 × 𝐻𝑊 × 𝑥; 𝑥= ; 𝑐=
𝐻𝑑 2
First, solve for c;
1476 𝑓𝑡 − 196.8 𝑓𝑡
𝑐=
2
𝒄 = 𝟔𝟑𝟗. 𝟔 𝒇𝒕
Calculating the x;
639.6 𝑓𝑡 × 1476 𝑓𝑡
𝑥=
1640 𝑓𝑡
𝒙 = 𝟓𝟕𝟓. 𝟔𝟒 𝒇𝒕
91 | P a g e
𝐴𝑤 = 0.5 × 1476 𝑓𝑡 × 575.64 𝑓𝑡
𝑨𝒘 = 𝟒𝟐𝟒, 𝟖𝟐𝟐 𝒇𝒕𝟐
𝑙𝑏
𝑃𝑤 = 424822 𝑓𝑡 2 × 984 𝑓𝑡 × 62.4
𝑓𝑡 3
𝑷𝒘 = 𝟐𝟔, 𝟎𝟖𝟒, 𝟕𝟕𝟎, 𝟏𝟔𝟑. 𝟕𝟏𝟐 𝒍𝒃𝒔
𝑊𝑡 = 182,216,096,640 𝑙𝑏𝑠 + 26,084,770,163.712 𝑙𝑏𝑠
𝑾𝒕 = 𝟐𝟎𝟖, 𝟑𝟎𝟎, 𝟖𝟔𝟔, 𝟖𝟎𝟑. 𝟕𝟏 𝒍𝒃𝒔
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑆. = ; 𝐴𝑏 = 𝐿𝑑 × 𝑊1
𝑊𝑡
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑆. =
𝑊𝑡
𝑙𝑏
432,000 × 984 𝑓𝑡 × 1476 𝑓𝑡
𝑓𝑡 3
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑆. =
208,300,866,803.71 𝑙𝑏𝑠
𝑭. 𝑺. 𝑺. = 𝟑. 𝟎𝟏𝟐𝟏𝟑𝟑
𝑃𝐻 = (0.5𝐻𝑤 ) × 𝜌𝑤 × 𝐻𝑤 × 𝐿𝐷
𝑙𝑏
𝑃𝐻 = (0.5 × 1476 𝑓𝑡) × 62.4 × 1476 𝑓𝑡 × 984 𝑓𝑡
𝑓𝑡 3
𝑷𝑯 = 𝟔𝟔, 𝟖𝟖𝟒, 𝟎𝟐𝟔, 𝟎𝟔𝟎. 𝟖 𝒍𝒃𝒔
92 | P a g e
𝑊1
𝑊𝐷 ( ) + 𝑃𝑤 (𝑊1 − 𝑥 ′ )
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑂. = 2
𝐻
𝑃𝐻 ( 𝑤 )
2
Where:
𝑥
𝑥′ =
3
575.64 𝑓𝑡
𝑥′ =
3
𝑥 ′ = 191.88 𝑓𝑡
1476 𝑓𝑡
182,216,096,640 𝑙𝑏𝑠 ( ) + 26,084,770,163.712 𝑙𝑏𝑠 (1476 − 191.88)𝑓𝑡
2
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑂. =
1476 𝑓𝑡
66,884,026,060.8 𝑙𝑏𝑠 ( )
2
𝑭. 𝑺. 𝑶. = 𝟑. 𝟒𝟎𝟐𝟗𝟓𝟗
than 1.
𝜇(𝑊𝑡 )
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝐿. 𝐷. =
𝑃𝐻
Where:
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑆. = 𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑂. = 𝐹. 𝑆. 𝐿. 𝐷. ≈ 4
𝜇 (𝑊𝑡 )
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝐿. 𝐷. =
𝑃𝐻
(𝐹. 𝑆. 𝐿. 𝐷. )(𝑃𝐻 )
𝜇=
𝑊𝑡
(4)(66,884,026,060.8 𝑙𝑏𝑠)
𝜇=
208,300,866,803.71 𝑙𝑏𝑠
93 | P a g e
𝝁 = 𝟏. 𝟐𝟖𝟒𝟑𝟕𝟑𝟒𝟓𝟔
correct.
3.3 Third Proposed Location
The third proposed location is located in Caagutayan, San Teodoro, Misamis Oriental near
Mt. Halcon. From the Table 1-4, the shaded area around the location is 21000 hectares. The
designers’ assumption for %seepage and %evaporation is 2 and 3, respectively. First, convert the
hectares to square meter.
10,000 𝑚2
21000 ℎ𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑠 × = 210,000,000 𝑚2
January
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 3 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (210,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 630,000 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 630,000 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 598,500 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 598,500 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟏𝟗𝟑𝟎𝟔. 𝟒𝟓𝟏𝟔𝟏
3
𝑄 = 19306.45161 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟎. 𝟐𝟐𝟑𝟒𝟓𝟒𝟑𝟎𝟏
𝒔
94 | P a g e
February
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 6.25 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (210,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 1,312,500 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 1,312,500 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 1,246,875 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 1,246,875 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟒𝟒𝟓𝟑𝟏. 𝟐𝟓
𝑄 = 44531.25 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟎. 𝟓𝟏𝟓𝟒𝟎𝟕𝟗𝟖𝟔
𝒔
March
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 10.8 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (210,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 2,268,000 𝑚3
95 | P a g e
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 2,268,000 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 2,154,600 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 2,154,600 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟔𝟗𝟓𝟎𝟑. 𝟐𝟐𝟓𝟖𝟏
𝑄 = 69503.22581 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟎. 𝟖𝟎𝟒𝟒𝟑𝟓𝟒𝟖𝟒
𝒔
April
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 68.4 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (210,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 14,364,000 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 14,364,000 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 13,645,800 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 13,645,800 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟒𝟓𝟒𝟖𝟔𝟎
𝑄 = 454860 × ×
96 | P a g e
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟓. 𝟐𝟔𝟒𝟓𝟖𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑
𝒔
May
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 209.05 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (210,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 43,900,500 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 43,900,500 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 41,705,475 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 41,705,475 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟏𝟑𝟒𝟓𝟑𝟑𝟕. 𝟗𝟎𝟑
𝑄 = 1345337.903 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟏𝟓. 𝟓𝟕𝟏𝟎𝟒𝟎𝟓𝟓
𝒔
June
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 308 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (210,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 64,680,000 𝑚3
97 | P a g e
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 64,680,000 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 61,446,000 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 61,446,000 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟐𝟎𝟒𝟖𝟐𝟎𝟎
𝑄 = 2048200 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟐𝟑. 𝟕𝟎𝟔𝟎𝟏𝟖𝟓𝟐
𝒔
July
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 756.05 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (210,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 158,770,500 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 158,770,500 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 150,831,975 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 150,831,975 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟒𝟖𝟔𝟓𝟓𝟒𝟕. 𝟓𝟖𝟏
98 | P a g e
𝑄 = 4865547.581 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟓𝟔. 𝟑𝟏𝟒𝟐𝟎𝟖𝟏𝟏
𝒔
August
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 784.75 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (210,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 164,797,500 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 164,797,500 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 156,557,625 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 156,557,625 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟓𝟎𝟓𝟎𝟐𝟒𝟓. 𝟗𝟔𝟖
𝑄 = 5050245.968 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟓𝟖. 𝟒𝟓𝟏𝟗𝟐𝟎𝟗𝟐
𝒔
September
99 | P a g e
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 388.8 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (210,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 81,648,000 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 81,648,000 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 77,565,600 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 77,565,600 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟐𝟓𝟖𝟓𝟓𝟐𝟎
𝑄 = 2585520 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟐𝟗. 𝟗𝟐𝟓
𝒔
October
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 448.1 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (210,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 94,101,000 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 94,101,000 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 89,395,950 𝑚3
100 | P a g e
𝑉𝑊𝐷 89,395,950 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟐𝟖𝟖𝟑𝟕𝟒𝟎. 𝟑𝟐𝟑
𝑄 = 𝟐𝟖𝟖𝟑𝟕𝟒𝟎. 𝟑𝟐𝟑 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟑𝟑. 𝟑𝟕𝟔𝟔𝟐𝟒𝟏
𝒔
November
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 279.35 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (210,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 58,663,500 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 58,663,500 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 55,730,325 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 55,730,325 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟏𝟖𝟓𝟕𝟔𝟕𝟕. 𝟓
𝑄 = 1857677.5 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟐𝟏. 𝟓𝟎𝟎𝟖𝟗𝟔𝟗𝟗
𝒔
101 | P a g e
December
1𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 85 𝑚𝑚 ( ) (210,000,000 𝑚2 )
1000 𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑤𝑠𝑎 = 17,850,000 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 17,850,000 𝑚3 (1 − 0.02 − 0.03)
𝑉𝑊𝐷 = 16,957,500 𝑚3
𝑉𝑊𝐷 16,957,500 𝑚3 𝒎𝟑
𝑄= = = 𝟓𝟒𝟕𝟎𝟏𝟔. 𝟏𝟐𝟗
3
𝑄 = 547016.129 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸 = 𝟔. 𝟑𝟑𝟏𝟐𝟎𝟓𝟏𝟗𝟕
𝒔
0.22 + 0.52 + 0.80 + 5.26 + 15.57 + 23.71 + 56.31 + 58.45 + 29.93 + 33.38 + 21.5 + 6.33
𝑄𝑎𝑣𝑒 =
12
𝒎𝟑
𝑸𝒂𝒗𝒆 = 𝟐𝟎. 𝟗𝟗𝟖𝟕𝟑𝟐𝟗𝟔
𝒔
𝑚3 3600 𝑠 24 ℎ𝑟𝑠
𝑄𝑎𝑣𝑒 = 20.99873296 × ×
𝒎𝟑
𝑸𝒂𝒗𝒆 = 𝟏𝟖𝟏𝟒𝟐𝟗𝟎. 𝟓𝟐𝟖
𝒅𝒂𝒚
102 | P a g e
The summary of the calculations based on the third proposed location is show at table below.
Table 3-9: Third Location Calculations Summary

RAINFALL %EVA %SEE SHADED
MONTH (mm) (mm) (mm) AREA (m²) Vws (m²) Vwd (m²) Q (m³/s) Q (m³/day)
JANUARY 3 3 2 210000000 630,000 598500 0.223454301 19306.45161
FEBRUARY 6.25 3 2 210000000 1,312,500 1246875 0.515407986 44531.25
MARCH 10.8 3 2 210000000 2,268,000 2154600 0.804435484 69503.22581
APRIL 68.4 3 2 210000000 14,364,000 13645800 5.264583333 454860
MAY 209.05 3 2 210000000 43,900,500 41705475 15.57104055 1345337.903
JUNE 308 3 2 210000000 64,680,000 61446000 23.70601852 2048200
JULY 756.05 3 2 210000000 158,770,500 150831975 56.31420811 4865547.581
AUGUST 784.75 3 2 210000000 164,797,500 156557625 58.45192092 5050245.968
SEPTEMBER 388.8 3 2 210000000 81,648,000 77565600 29.925 2585520
OCTOBER 448.1 3 2 210000000 94,101,000 89395950 33.3766241 2883740.323
NOVEMBER 279.35 3 2 210000000 58,663,500 55730325 21.50089699 1857677.5
DECEMBER 85 3 2 210000000 17,850,000 16957500 6.331205197 547016.129
AVERAGE 278.9625 58,582,125 55653018.75 20.99873296 1814290.528
For graphical representation of the data calculated,
5500000
4500000
3500000
2500000
1500000
500000
-500000
Figure 3-3: Graphical Representation of the Flow Rate per Day and Average Flow Rate in Third
Proposed Location
103 | P a g e
For the second option, the operation hours per day for average demand is 16 hours.
flow rate for average and peak demand,
𝑄𝑎𝑣𝑒 ( )= (𝑄1 ) + (𝑄2 )
Where Qave in m3/day is 1,814,290.528 m3/day. Substituting,
1,814,290.528 = (𝑄1 ) + (𝑄2 )
1,814,290.528 𝑚3 = 16 ℎ𝑟𝑠(𝑄1 ) + 8 ℎ𝑟𝑠(𝑄2 )
′ ′
𝑃𝑡1 = 𝑄1 × 𝛾 × 𝐻𝑁1 ; 𝑃𝑡2 = 𝑄2 × 𝛾 × 𝐻𝑁2
′ ′
𝑃𝑡1 𝑃𝑡2
𝐻𝑁′ = =
𝑄1 × 𝛾 𝑄2 × 𝛾
𝑃𝑡1 𝑃𝑡2
=
𝑄1 𝑄2
Solving for Q2,
𝑃𝑡2
𝑄2 = 𝑄1 ( )
𝑃𝑡1
52,290.7832 𝑘𝑊
𝑄2 = 𝑄1 ( )
32,833.74759 𝑘𝑊
𝑄2 = 1.592592593(𝑄1 )
1,814,290.528 𝑚3 = 16 ℎ𝑟𝑠(𝑄1 ) + 8 ℎ𝑟𝑠(1.592592593 (𝑄1 ))
1,814,290.528 𝑚3 = 16 ℎ𝑟𝑠(𝑄1 ) + 12.740740741 ℎ𝑟𝑠(𝑄1 )
104 | P a g e
Solving for Q1,
1,814,290.528 𝑚3 = 𝑄1 (16 ℎ𝑟𝑠 + 12.740740741 ℎ𝑟𝑠)
1,814,290.528 𝑚3 𝑚3 1 ℎ𝑟
𝑄1 = = 63,126.08794 ×
(16 + 12.740740741)ℎ𝑟𝑠 ℎ𝑟 3600 𝑠
𝒎𝟑
𝑸𝟏 = 𝟏𝟕. 𝟓𝟑𝟓𝟎𝟐𝟒𝟒𝟑
𝒔
Solving for Q2,
𝑄2 = 1.592592593(𝑄1 )
𝑚3
𝑄2 = 1.592592593 (17.53502443 )
𝑠
𝒎𝟑
𝑸𝟐 = 27.92615002
𝒔
Thus, the head of the hydroelectric power plant, which is based on 2 nd location and option,
is,
𝑃𝑡1
𝐻𝑁′ =
𝑄1 × 𝛾
𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚
32,833.74759
𝐻𝑁′ = 𝑠 =
𝑚3 𝑘𝑁
191 × 9.81 3
𝑠 𝑚
𝑯′𝑵 = 𝟏𝟗𝟎. 𝟖𝟕𝟑𝟐𝟓𝟏𝟗 𝒎 ≈ 𝟏𝟗𝟏 𝒎
For Checking,
𝑃𝑡2
𝐻𝑁′ =
𝑄1 × 𝛾
𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚
52,290.7832
𝐻𝑁′ = 𝑠
𝑚3 𝑘𝑁
27.92615005 × 9.81 3
𝑠 𝑚
𝑯′𝑵 = 𝟏𝟗𝟎. 𝟖𝟕𝟑𝟐𝟓𝟏𝟗 𝒎 ≈ 𝟏𝟗𝟏 𝒎
The checking confirms the value that the designers’ calculations are correct.
105 | P a g e

Variables Values
𝐻𝑁′
𝜂𝑝 = × 100
𝐻𝑁
𝐻𝑁′ = 0.65 (191 𝑚)
𝑯′𝑵 = 𝟏𝟐𝟒. 𝟏𝟓 𝒎
𝐻𝑓 = 191 𝑚 − 124.15 𝑚
𝑯𝒇 = 𝟔𝟔. 𝟖𝟓 𝒎
𝑉𝑡′ = √2𝑔(𝐻𝑁′ )
𝑚
𝑉𝑡′ = √2 × 9.81 × 124.15 𝑚
𝑠2
𝒎
𝑽′𝒕 = 𝟒𝟗. 𝟑𝟓𝟒𝟎𝟓𝟕𝟓𝟖
𝒔
106 | P a g e

2
𝜋(𝐷𝑝 )
𝑄= × 𝑉𝑡 ′
4
4𝑄
𝐷𝑝 = √
𝜋 (𝑉𝑡′ )
4 × 20.99873296 𝑚3 /𝑠
𝐷𝑝 = √
𝜋 (49.3540576 𝑚/𝑠)
𝑫𝒑 = 𝟎. 𝟕𝟑𝟔𝟎𝟐𝟎𝟗𝟒𝟒 𝒎
hydroelectric power plant. The calculated penstock which has a value of 0.736020944 m is less
than 1 m, thus, there is no more need of additional penstock.
𝑓 × 𝐿𝑝 × (𝑉𝑡′ )2
𝐻𝑓 =
2𝑔𝐷𝑝
2 × 𝑔 × 𝐻𝑓 × 𝐷𝑝
𝐿𝑝 =
𝑓(𝑉𝑡′ )2
𝑚
2 × 9.81 × 66.85 𝑚 × 0.736020944 𝑚
𝐿𝑝 = 𝑠2
𝑚2
0.002 (49.35405758)2 2
𝑠
𝑳𝒑 = 𝟏𝟗𝟖. 𝟏𝟓𝟗𝟒𝟖𝟓 𝒎
calculated head of water is 191 m which is less than the length of penstock. Thus, the length of
penstock (Lp) is greater than the head of water (HN) which is acceptable.
Determining the inclination angle of penstock (θ), use Eq. 1.13.
𝐻𝑁
𝜃 = sin−1 ( )
𝐿𝑝
107 | P a g e
191
𝜃 = sin−1 ( )
198.159485
𝜽 = 𝟕𝟒. 𝟓𝟓𝟏𝟒𝟔𝟎𝟔𝟑°
The angle of inclination should be greater than 45˚. The computed angle of inclination is
74.55146063˚ which is greater than 45˚ which is acceptable.
Determining the hydrostatic pressure in turbine (PW),
𝑃𝑤 = 𝛾 × 𝐻𝑁′
𝑘𝑁
𝑃𝑤 = 9.81 × 124.15 𝑚
𝑚3
𝑷𝒘 = 𝟏, 𝟐𝟏𝟕. 𝟗𝟏𝟏𝟓 𝒌𝑷𝒂 = 𝟏𝟕𝟔. 𝟔𝟗𝟏𝟖𝟐𝟑𝟖 𝑷𝒔𝒊
Determining the thickness of penstock, use Eq. 1.14. The factor of safety is 3 for repeated,
one direction and mild shock (Refer to page 20, Design of Machine Elements by Faires, Table 1.1).
𝑡𝑝 =
2 × 𝑆𝑑
𝑙𝑏
176.6918238 × 0.736020944 𝑚
𝑡𝑝 = 𝑖𝑛2
𝑙𝑏
5000 2
2× 𝑖𝑛
3
𝑡𝑝 = 0.003901466 𝑚
𝒕𝒑 = 𝟎. 𝟏𝟓𝟑𝟔𝟎𝟏𝟎𝟒𝟑 𝒊𝒏
The thickness of penstock should be equal to or less than 0.25 inch thick. The calculated
thickness is 0.153601043 in which is less than 0.25 inch, thus, the design is acceptable.
108 | P a g e
Table 3-11: Surge Tank Design Given Values

Given Values

Head due to Friction (Hf) 66.85 m
Net Head (HN) 191 m
%Allowance 10%
𝐻𝑁 𝐻𝑓
sin 𝜃 = =
𝐿𝑝 𝐿𝑓
𝐿𝑓 =
𝐻𝑁
(66.85 𝑚)(198.159485 𝑚)
𝐿𝑓 =
191 𝑚
𝑳𝒇 = 𝟔𝟗. 𝟑𝟓𝟓𝟖𝟏𝟗𝟕𝟔 𝒎
2
𝑉𝑤𝑝 =
4
𝜋(0.73602094 𝑚)2 (69.35581976 𝑚)

𝑉𝑤𝑝 =
4
𝑽𝒘𝒑 = 𝟐𝟗. 𝟓𝟎𝟖𝟗𝟎𝟕𝟖𝟕 𝒎𝟑
109 | P a g e
𝑉𝑆𝑇 = (1 + 0.10)(29.50890787 𝑚3 )
𝑽𝑺𝑻 = 𝟑𝟐. 𝟒𝟓𝟗𝟕𝟗𝟖𝟔𝟔 𝒎𝟑
𝑉𝑆𝑇 =
4
𝑉𝑆𝑇 =
4
𝑉𝑆𝑇 =
4
3 4 (𝑉𝑆𝑇 )
𝐷𝑆𝑇 = √
3𝜋
3 4 (32.459799 𝑚3 )
𝐷𝑆𝑇 = √
3𝜋
𝑫𝑺𝑻 = 𝟐. 𝟑𝟗𝟕𝟐𝟏𝟗𝟐𝟗𝟔 𝒎
𝐻𝑆𝑇 = 3(2.397219296 𝑚)
𝑯𝑺𝑻 = 𝟕. 𝟏𝟗𝟏𝟔𝟓𝟕𝟖𝟖𝟕 𝒎
𝑘𝑁
𝑃𝑏 = 9.81 × 7.191658 𝑚
𝑚3
𝑷𝒃 = 𝟕𝟎. 𝟓𝟓𝟎𝟏𝟔𝟑𝟖𝟕 𝒌𝑷𝒂
𝑷𝒃 = 𝟏𝟎. 𝟐𝟑𝟓𝟐𝟓𝟔𝟗𝟑 𝑷𝒔𝒊
110 | P a g e
2
𝑃𝑐 = (10.23525693 𝑃𝑠𝑖)
3
𝑷𝒄 = 𝟔. 𝟖𝟐𝟑𝟓𝟎𝟒𝟔𝟐𝟑 𝑷𝒔𝒊
42,000 Psi.
𝑡𝑆𝑇 =
2(𝑆𝑑 )
6.823504623 𝑃𝑠𝑖 (2.397219296 𝑚)

𝑡𝑆𝑇 =
42000 𝑃𝑠𝑖
2( )
7
𝑡𝑆𝑇 = 0.00136312 𝑚
𝒕𝑺𝑻 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟓𝟑𝟔𝟔𝟔𝟏𝟑𝟐 𝒊𝒏
𝑡𝐵𝑆𝑇 =
4(𝑆𝑑 )
10.23525693 𝑃𝑠𝑖 (2.397219296 𝑚)

𝑡𝐵𝑆𝑇 =
42000 𝑃𝑠𝑖
4( )
7
𝑡𝐵𝑆𝑇 = 0.00102234 𝑚
𝒕𝑩𝑺𝑻 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟒𝟎𝟐𝟒𝟗𝟓𝟗𝟗 𝒊𝒏
Water dam shall be designed which is based on the computed net head (HN). The
water dam.
111 | P a g e
Table 3-12: Water Dam Surge Tank Design

Given Values
Bottom Width (W1) 220 m 721.60 ft

Water Dam Height (HD) 300 m 984 ft
Height of Water in Dam (HW) 250 m 820 ft
𝑊1 + 𝑊2
𝑊𝐷 = ( ) (𝐿𝐷 )(𝐻𝐷 )(𝜌𝑐 )
2
721.6 + 426.4 𝑙𝑏
𝑊𝐷 = ( ) 𝑓𝑡 (984 𝑓𝑡)(984 𝑓𝑡) (135 3 )
2 𝑓𝑡
𝑾𝑫 = 𝟕𝟓, 𝟎𝟑𝟎, 𝟏𝟓𝟕, 𝟒𝟒𝟎 𝒍𝒃𝒔
112 | P a g e
Where:
𝑐 × 𝐻𝑊 𝑊1 − 𝑊2
𝐴𝑤 = 0.5 × 𝐻𝑊 × 𝑥; 𝑥= ; 𝑐=
𝐻𝑑 2
First, solve for c;
721.6 𝑓𝑡 − 426.4 𝑓𝑡
𝑐=
2
𝒄 = 𝟏𝟒𝟕. 𝟔 𝒇𝒕
Calculating the x;
147.6 𝑓𝑡 × 820 𝑓𝑡
𝑥=
984 𝑓𝑡
𝒙 = 𝟏𝟐𝟑 𝒇𝒕
𝐴𝑤 = 0.5 × 820 𝑓𝑡 × 123 𝑓𝑡
𝑨𝒘 = 𝟓𝟎, 𝟒𝟑𝟎 𝒇𝒕𝟐
𝑙𝑏
𝑃𝑤 = 50430 𝑓𝑡 2 × 984 𝑓𝑡 × 62.4
𝑓𝑡 3
𝑷𝒘 = 𝟑, 𝟎𝟗𝟔, 𝟒𝟖𝟐, 𝟔𝟖𝟖 𝒍𝒃𝒔
𝑊𝑡 = 75,030,157,440 𝑙𝑏𝑠 + 3,096,482,688 𝑙𝑏𝑠
𝑾𝒕 = 𝟕𝟖, 𝟏𝟐𝟔, 𝟔𝟒𝟎, 𝟏𝟐𝟖 𝒍𝒃𝒔
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑆. = ; 𝐴𝑏 = 𝐿𝑑 × 𝑊1
𝑊𝑡
113 | P a g e
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑆. =
𝑊𝑡
𝑙𝑏
432,000 × 984 𝑓𝑡 × 721.6 𝑓𝑡
𝑓𝑡 3
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑆. =
78,126,640,128 𝑙𝑏𝑠
𝑭. 𝑺. 𝑺. = 𝟑. 𝟗𝟐𝟔𝟐𝟑𝟒
𝑃𝐻 = (0.5𝐻𝑤 ) × 𝜌𝑤 × 𝐻𝑤 × 𝐿𝐷
𝑙𝑏
𝑃𝐻 = (0.5 × 820 𝑓𝑡) × 62.4 × 820 𝑓𝑡 × 984 𝑓𝑡
𝑓𝑡 3
𝑷𝑯 = 𝟐𝟎, 𝟔𝟒𝟑, 𝟐𝟏𝟕, 𝟗𝟐𝟎 𝒍𝒃𝒔
𝑊1
𝑊𝐷 ( ) + 𝑃𝑤 (𝑊1 − 𝑥 ′ )
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑂. = 2
𝐻
𝑃𝐻 ( 𝑤 )
2
Where:
𝑥
𝑥′ =
3
123 𝑓𝑡
𝑥′ =
3
𝑥 ′ = 41 𝑓𝑡
721.6 𝑓𝑡
75,030,157,440 𝑙𝑏𝑠 ( ) + 3,096,482,688 𝑙𝑏𝑠 (721.6 − 41)𝑓𝑡
2
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑂. =
820 𝑓𝑡
20,643,217,920 𝑙𝑏𝑠 ( )
2
𝑭. 𝑺. 𝑶. = 𝟑. 𝟒𝟒𝟕𝟒𝟔𝟐
114 | P a g e
than 1.
𝜇(𝑊𝑡 )
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝐿. 𝐷. =
𝑃𝐻
Where:
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑆. = 𝐹. 𝑆. 𝑂. = 𝐹. 𝑆. 𝐿. 𝐷. ≈ 4
𝜇 (𝑊𝑡 )
𝐹. 𝑆. 𝐿. 𝐷. =
𝑃𝐻
(𝐹. 𝑆. 𝐿. 𝐷. )(𝑃𝐻 )
𝜇=
𝑊𝑡
(4)(20,643,217,920 𝑙𝑏𝑠)
𝜇=
78,126,640,128 𝑙𝑏𝑠
𝝁 = 𝟏. 𝟎𝟓𝟔𝟗𝟏𝟎𝟓𝟔𝟗
correct.
3.4 Summary of Chapter 3 Computations
The summary of the calculated values of each of the proposed locations are listed below in
tables.
3.4.1 First Proposed Location
Table 3-13: Values for Specification of the Hydroelectric Power Plant

Variables Values
14 hours (Average)
Operational Hours
10 hours (Peak)
Volume Flow Rate for Average Demand Use 13.63284077 m³/s
Volume Flow Rate for Peak Demand Use 21.71156123 m³/s
Head of Water 246 m
Volume of Water at Dam 45,052,443.75 m³

115 | P a g e
Table 3-14: Computed Penstock Specifications

Variables Values
Diameter (Dp) 0.663766591 m
Length (LP) 331.8832954 m

Thickness of Penstock (tp) 0.137239071 in
Table 3-15: Computed Surge Tank Specifications

Variables Values
Volume of Surge Tank (VST) 63.16387177 m³
Diameter of surge Tank (DST) 2.99282352 m

Height of Surge Tank (HST) 8.978470559 m
Thickness of Surge Tank (tST) 0.083646347 in
Thickness at Bottom (TBST) 0.06273476 in
Table 3-16: Water Dam Specifications

Variables Values
Bottom Width (W1) 340 m
Top Width (W2) 120 m

Height of Dam (HD) 380 m
Length of Dam (LD) 320 m
Designed Height of Water (HW) 370 m
Factor of Safety due to Sinking (F.S.S.) 3.435292224
Factor of Safety due to Overturning (F.S.O.) 3.014567439
Coefficient of Friction (μ) 1.310668614
116 | P a g e
3.4.2 Second Proposed Location

Variables Values
18 hours (Average)
Operational Hours
6 hours (Peak)
Head of Water 428 m

Variables Values
Length (LP) 82.84117077 m

Angle of Inclination (ϴ) N/A

Variables Values
Volume of Surge Tank (VST) 3.208899143 m²

117 | P a g e

Variables Values
Top Width (W2) 60 m

3.4.3 Third Proposed Location

Variables Values
16 hours (Average)
Operational Hours
8 hours (Peak)
Head of Water 191 m

Variables Values
Length (LP) 198.159485 m

118 | P a g e

Variables Values


Variables Values

119 | P a g e
CHAPTER 4
DESIGN CONSTRAINTS, TRADE-OFFS AND STANDARDS
4.1 DESIGN CONSTRAINTS
The proponents will attain the ability to design mechanical system to meet desired needs
within realistic constraints such as economic, efficiency, and sustainability. The issues shall
challenge them to assemble all pertinent facts, and then make better decision through better
understanding, ingenuity, and judgment of all manner.
4.1.1 Economic (Total Cost)
This factor contemplates about the growth and development in financial aspects. It has high
regards with its financial comparability to current or existing power plant. The designers’ estimation
of the total cost of the project is composed of Total Material Cost (CostMC), Cost of Powerhouse
Equipment (Costph), Labor Cost (CostL), Equivalent Yearly Minimum Wage Rate (EYMR),
Installation Cost (Costinst), Site Identification and Preliminary Assessment Cost (CostSP), Transport
and Other Cost (CostTO), and Design, Engineering and Project Management Cost (CostDEP).
4.1.1.1 First Proposed Location
For the estimation of the total cost of the project based on the first proposed location,
Volume of dam (Vd)
𝑊𝑑 137,198,002,176.00
𝑉𝑑 = =
𝑑𝑐 135
𝑽𝒅 = 𝟏, 𝟎𝟏𝟔, 𝟐𝟖𝟏, 𝟒𝟗𝟕. 𝟔𝟎 𝒇𝒕³
Number of bags per cubic yard (Nb)
27 27 𝑩𝒂𝒈𝒔
𝑁𝑏 = = = 𝟒. 𝟓
𝐴+𝐵+𝐶 1+2+3 𝒀𝒂𝒓𝒅𝟑
Total number of bags (Nbt)
𝑁𝑏𝑡 = 𝑁𝑏 𝑥 𝑉𝑑 = 4.5 𝑥 1,016,281,497.60
𝑵𝒃𝒕 = 𝟏𝟔𝟗, 𝟑𝟖𝟎, 𝟐𝟒𝟗. 𝟔𝟎 𝑩𝒂𝒈𝒔
120 | P a g e
Volume of water needed (Vw)
𝑉𝑤 = 𝑁𝑏𝑡 𝑥 7.5 = 𝟏𝟐𝟕𝟎𝟑𝟓𝟏𝟖𝟕𝟐 𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒔
Volume of sand needed
1 1
𝑉𝑠𝑎𝑛𝑑 = 𝑁𝑏 𝑥 𝑉𝑑 𝑥 𝐵 = 4.5 𝑥 1,016,281,497.60 𝑥 2 𝑥 𝑥
27 3.283
𝑽𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒅 = 𝟗, 𝟔𝟎𝟎, 𝟎𝟎𝟎. 𝟎𝟎 𝒎³
Volume of gravel needed
1 1
𝑉𝑔𝑟𝑎𝑣𝑒𝑙 = 𝑁𝑏 𝑥 𝑉𝑑 𝑥 𝐶 = 4.5 𝑥 1,016,281,497.60 𝑥 3 𝑥 𝑥
27 3.283
𝑉𝑔𝑟𝑎𝑣𝑒𝑙 = 14,400,000.00 𝑚³
Dam construction material cost
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝐷𝐶 = (𝐶𝑒𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑏𝑎𝑔 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑡 𝑥 𝑁𝑏𝑡) + (𝑆𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑡 𝑥 𝑉𝑠𝑎𝑛𝑑)

+ (𝐺𝑟𝑎𝑣𝑒𝑙 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑡 𝑥 𝑉𝑔𝑟𝑎𝑣𝑒𝑙)
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝐷𝐶 = 𝑃ℎ𝑝245.00 𝑥 169,380,249.60 + 𝑃ℎ𝑝700.00 𝑥 9,600,000.00

+ 𝑃ℎ𝑝700.00 𝑥 14,400,000.00
𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝒅𝒄 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟓𝟖, 𝟐𝟗𝟖, 𝟏𝟔𝟏, 𝟏𝟓𝟐. 𝟎𝟎
Total volume of reinforcement steel bars
𝑉𝑟𝑠𝑡 = 0.015 (𝑉𝑑) = 0.015𝑥1,016,281,497.60
𝑽𝒓𝒔𝒕 = 𝟏𝟓, 𝟐𝟒𝟒, 𝟐𝟐𝟐. 𝟒𝟔𝒇𝒕³ = 𝟒𝟑𝟐, 𝟎𝟎𝟎. 𝟎𝟎𝒎³
Volume of reinforced steel bars
𝜋(𝐷𝑟𝑠 3 )(𝐿𝑟𝑠) 𝜋(0.0363 )(12)

𝑉𝑟𝑠 = =
4 4
𝑽𝒓𝒔 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟏𝟐𝟐𝟏𝟒𝟓𝟏𝟐 𝒎³
Number of reinforced steel bars
𝑉𝑟𝑠𝑡 432,000
𝑁𝑟𝑠𝑡 = =
𝑉𝑟𝑠 0.012214512
121 | P a g e
𝑵𝑹𝑺𝑻 = 𝟑𝟒, 𝟑𝟒𝟔, 𝟎𝟐𝟗. 𝟔𝟗 = 𝟑𝟒, 𝟑𝟒𝟔, 𝟎𝟑𝟎. 𝟎𝟎 𝑺𝒕𝒆𝒆𝒍 𝑩𝒂𝒓𝒔
Hydrostatic Pressure Acting on Dam (PD)
𝑤(𝐻𝑤) 62.4 (1213.6)

𝑃𝑑 = =
2 2
𝑷𝑫 = 𝟑𝟕𝟖𝟔𝟒. 𝟑𝟐 𝑷𝒔𝒇 = 𝟐𝟔𝟐. 𝟗𝟒𝟔𝟔𝟔𝟔𝟕 𝑷𝒔𝒊 = 𝟏. 𝟖𝟏𝟐𝟒𝟓𝟑𝟖𝟏 𝑴𝒑𝒂
Cost of Reinforced Steel Bars (Costrst)
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑠𝑡 = 𝑃ℎ𝑝1,917.60 𝑥 𝑁𝑟𝑠𝑡
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑠𝑡 = 𝑃ℎ𝑝 1,917.60 𝑥34,346,030.00
𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒔𝒕 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟔𝟓, 𝟖𝟔𝟏, 𝟗𝟒𝟕, 𝟏𝟐𝟖. 𝟎𝟎
Total Material Cost (Costmc)
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑚𝑐 = 𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑑𝑐 + 𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑠𝑡
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑚𝑐 = 𝑃ℎ𝑝56,613,992,052.05 + 𝑃ℎ𝑝65,861,947,128.00
𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝒎𝒄 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟏𝟐𝟐, 𝟒𝟕𝟓, 𝟗𝟑𝟗, 𝟏𝟖𝟎. 𝟎𝟓
Cost of Powerhouse Equipment (Based on E&M Equipment formula) (2008)(From Appendix 8)
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑝ℎ = 1.1948 (𝑃0.7634 ) = 1.1948 𝑥 430.7634 𝑥 $1,000,000.00
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑝ℎ = $ 21,100,125.23 = 𝑃ℎ𝑝 1,098,683,520.89
Accuracy: 92%
𝐴𝑑𝑗𝑢𝑠𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑝ℎ = (1 + 𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑢𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑦)(𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑝ℎ )
𝐴𝑑𝑗𝑢𝑠𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑝ℎ = 1.92 𝑥 𝑃ℎ𝑝1,098,683,520.89
𝑨𝒅𝒋𝒖𝒔𝒕𝒆𝒅 𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝒑𝒉 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟐, 𝟏𝟎𝟗, 𝟒𝟕𝟐, 𝟑𝟔𝟎. 𝟏𝟎
𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑝ℎ = 𝐴𝑑𝑗𝑢𝑠𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑝ℎ (1 + 𝑖)𝑛
122 | P a g e
Interest (i): 9 %
Years (n): 10 years
𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑝ℎ = 𝑃ℎ𝑝2,109,472,360.10𝑥1.0910
𝑷𝒓𝒆𝒔𝒆𝒏𝒕 𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝒑𝒉 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟒, 𝟗𝟗𝟑, 𝟖𝟖𝟖, 𝟐𝟑𝟕. 𝟖𝟔
Manpower Cost
No. of Shifts = 3 Shifts

No. of Workers/shift = 6,000 Workers
Working Hours = 8 hours
Applicable Daily Rate (ADR) = Php 300
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑚𝑝 = 𝑊𝑜𝑟𝑘𝑒𝑟𝑠 𝑥𝑊𝑜𝑟𝑘𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝐻𝑜𝑢𝑟𝑠 𝑥𝑁𝑜. 𝑜𝑓 𝑆ℎ𝑖𝑓𝑡𝑠 𝑥 𝐴𝐷𝑅
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑚𝑝 = 6,000𝑥8𝑥3𝑥𝑃ℎ𝑝300
𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝒎𝒑 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟒𝟑, 𝟐𝟎𝟎, 𝟎𝟎𝟎
Monthly Minimum Wage Rate (EMMR) (Appendix 7)
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑚𝑝 𝑥 393.5 𝑃ℎ𝑝43,200,000 𝑥393.5

𝐸𝑀𝑀𝑅 = =
12 12
𝑬𝑴𝑴𝑹 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑𝟏, 𝟒𝟏𝟔, 𝟔𝟎𝟎, 𝟎𝟎𝟎. 𝟎𝟎 𝒑𝒆𝒓 𝒎𝒐𝒏𝒕𝒉 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑𝟏𝟔, 𝟗𝟗𝟗, 𝟐𝟎𝟎, 𝟎𝟎𝟎. 𝟎𝟎 𝒑𝒆𝒓 𝒚𝒆𝒂𝒓
Installation Cost
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑠𝑡 = $2.13 𝑥 𝑃𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 𝑂𝑢𝑡𝑝𝑢𝑡 (𝑊)
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑠𝑡 = $2.13𝑥43,000,000.00
𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒕 = $ 𝟗𝟏, 𝟓𝟗𝟎, 𝟎𝟎𝟎. 𝟎𝟎 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟒, 𝟕𝟔𝟗, 𝟎𝟗𝟏, 𝟑𝟎𝟎. 𝟎𝟎
Site Identification and Preliminary assessment
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑆𝑃 = $15,000.00
𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝑺𝑷 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟕𝟖𝟏, 𝟎𝟓𝟎. 𝟎𝟎
123 | P a g e
Transport and other Cost
From Appendix 5,
Fuel Consumption No. of Vehicles/day 20
(l/h) Maintenance and other 20 %
Excavator 8.87
Diesel Fuel Cost Php39.40 per
32.52
liter
23.96
21.96
17.62
17.29
Wheel 15.07
Loaders 14.59
16.43
14.5
13.96
12.76
Truck 18.67
18.78
22.74
Bulldozer 33.16
Average: 18.93
𝑣𝑒ℎ𝑖𝑐𝑙𝑒
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑡𝑜 = 𝑁𝑜. 𝑜𝑓 𝑥 𝐴𝑣𝑒. 𝐹𝑢𝑒𝑙 𝐶𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑢𝑚𝑝𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑥 1.2 𝑥 𝐹𝑢𝑒𝑙 𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡
𝑑𝑎𝑦
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑡𝑜 = 20 𝑥 18.93 𝑥 1.2 𝑥 𝑃ℎ𝑝39.40
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑡𝑜 = 𝑃ℎ𝑝17,900.21 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑑𝑎𝑦
= 𝑃ℎ𝑝429,604.99 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑚𝑜𝑛𝑡ℎ
= 𝑷𝒉𝒑𝟓, 𝟏𝟓𝟓, 𝟐𝟓𝟗. 𝟗𝟎 𝒑𝒆𝒓 𝒚𝒆𝒂𝒓
Design, Engineering and Project Management Cost (USD 1 - 10 million)
Tariff = 1% (Tariff of Imported Turbine based from http://tariffcommission.gov.ph)

Years of Completion (n) = 5 years
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝐷𝐸𝑃 = $7,000,000.00
124 | P a g e
𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝑫𝑬𝑷 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟑𝟔𝟒, 𝟒𝟗𝟎, 𝟎𝟎𝟎. 𝟎𝟎
Total Cost
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑡 = Cost mc + tariff(Present Cost ph ) + EMMR + Cost inst + Cost sp + Cost to + Cost dep + Other Cost
Where: Other Cost = 5% (CostST)

𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑚𝑐 + 𝑡𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑓𝑓(𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑝ℎ ) + 𝐸𝑀𝑀𝑅 + 𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑠𝑡 + 𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑠𝑝 + 𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑡𝑜 + 𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑑𝑒𝑝 + 𝑂𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑟 𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑡 =
0.95
𝑃ℎ𝑝122,475,939,180.05 + 𝑃ℎ𝑝5,043,827,120.23 +
𝑃ℎ𝑝84,996,000,000.00 + 𝑃ℎ𝑝4,769,091,300.00
+𝑃ℎ𝑝781,050.00 + 𝑃ℎ𝑝25,776,299.52 + 𝑃ℎ𝑝364,490,000.00
0.95
𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝑻 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟐𝟐𝟗, 𝟏𝟑𝟐, 𝟓𝟑𝟏, 𝟓𝟐𝟔. 𝟏𝟏
125 | P a g e
4.1.1.2 Second Proposed Location
For the estimation of the total cost of the project based on the second proposed location,
Volume of dam (Vd)
𝑊𝑑 224,733,185,856.00
𝑉𝑑 = =
𝑑𝑐 135
𝑽𝒅 = 𝟏, 𝟔𝟔𝟒, 𝟔𝟗𝟎, 𝟐𝟔𝟓. 𝟔𝟎 𝒇𝒕³
𝑁𝑏 = = = 𝟒. 𝟓
𝑁𝑏𝑡 = 𝑁𝑏 𝑥 𝑉𝑑 = 4.5 𝑥 1,664,690,265.60
𝑵𝒃𝒕 = 𝟐𝟕𝟕, 𝟒𝟒𝟖, 𝟑𝟕𝟕. 𝟔𝟎 𝑩𝒂𝒈𝒔
𝑉𝑤 = 𝑁𝑏𝑡 𝑥 7.5 = 𝟐𝟎𝟖𝟎𝟖𝟔𝟐𝟖𝟑𝟐 𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒔

1 1
27 3.283
𝑽𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒅 = 𝟏𝟓, 𝟕𝟐𝟓, 𝟎𝟎𝟎. 𝟎𝟎 𝒎³

1 1
𝑉𝑔𝑟𝑎𝑣𝑒𝑙 = 𝑁𝑏 𝑥 𝑉𝑑 𝑥 𝐶 = 4.5 𝑥 1,664,690,265.60 𝑥 3 𝑥 𝑥
27 3.283
𝑽𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒍 = 𝟐𝟑, 𝟓𝟖𝟕, 𝟓𝟎𝟎. 𝟎𝟎 𝒎³
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑑𝑐 = (𝐶𝑒𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑏𝑎𝑔 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑡 𝑥 𝑁𝑏𝑡) + (𝑆𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑡 𝑥 𝑉𝑠𝑎𝑛𝑑)

126 | P a g e
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑑𝑐 = (𝑃ℎ𝑝245.00 𝑥 277,448,377.60) + (𝑃ℎ𝑝700.00 𝑥 15,725,000.00)

+ (𝑃ℎ𝑝700.00 𝑥 23,587,500.00)
𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝒅𝒄 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟗𝟓, 𝟒𝟗𝟑, 𝟔𝟎𝟐, 𝟓𝟏𝟐. 𝟎𝟎
𝑉𝑟𝑠𝑡 = 0.015 (𝑉𝑑) = 0.015𝑥1,664,690,265.60
𝑽𝒓𝒔𝒕 = 𝟐𝟒, 𝟗𝟕𝟎, 𝟑𝟓𝟑. 𝟗𝟖𝒇𝒕³ = 𝟕𝟎𝟕, 𝟔𝟐𝟓. 𝟎𝟎𝒎³
𝜋(𝐷𝑟𝑠 3 )(𝐿𝑟𝑠) 𝜋(0.0363 )(12)

𝑉𝑟𝑠 = =
4 4
𝑽𝒓𝒔 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟏𝟐𝟐𝟏𝟒𝟓𝟏𝟐 𝒎³
𝑉𝑟𝑠𝑡 707,625.00
𝑉𝑟𝑠 0.012214512
𝑵𝑹𝑺𝑻 = 𝟓𝟕, 𝟗𝟑𝟑, 𝟏𝟑𝟔. 𝟏𝟏 = 𝟓𝟕, 𝟗𝟑𝟑, 𝟏𝟑𝟕. 𝟎𝟎𝑺𝒕𝒆𝒆𝒍 𝑩𝒂𝒓𝒔
𝑤(𝐻𝑤) 62.4 (1476)

𝑃𝐷 = =
2 2
𝑷𝑫 = 𝟒𝟔𝟎𝟓𝟏. 𝟐 𝑷𝒔𝒇 = 𝟑𝟏𝟗. 𝟖 𝑷𝒔𝒊 = 𝟐. 𝟐𝟎𝟒𝟑𝟑𝟓𝟕𝟏𝟒 𝑴𝒑𝒂
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑠𝑡 = 𝑃ℎ𝑝 1,917.60 𝑥 57,933,137.00
𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒔𝒕 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟏𝟏𝟏, 𝟎𝟗𝟐, 𝟓𝟖𝟑, 𝟓𝟏𝟏. 𝟐𝟎
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑚𝑐 = 𝑃ℎ𝑝95,493,602,512.00 + 𝑃ℎ𝑝111,092,583,511.20
127 | P a g e
𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝒎𝒄 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟐𝟎𝟔, 𝟓𝟖𝟔, 𝟏𝟖𝟔, 𝟎𝟐𝟑. 𝟐𝟎
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑝ℎ = 1.1948 (𝑃0.7634 ) = 1.1948 𝑥 430.7634 𝑥 $1,000,000.00
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑝ℎ = $ 21,100,125.23 = 𝑃ℎ𝑝 1,098,683,520.89
Accuracy: 92%
Interest (i): 9%
Year (n): 10 years
𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑝ℎ = 𝑃ℎ𝑝2,109,472,360.10 𝑥 1.0910
Manpower Cost

𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝒎𝒑 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟒𝟑, 𝟐𝟎𝟎, 𝟎𝟎𝟎
128 | P a g e
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑚𝑝 𝑥 393.5 𝑃ℎ𝑝43,200,000 𝑥393.5

12 12
Installation Cost
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑠𝑡 = $2.13𝑥43,000,000.00
𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒕 = $ 𝟗𝟏, 𝟓𝟗𝟎, 𝟎𝟎𝟎. 𝟎𝟎 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟒, 𝟕𝟔𝟗, 𝟎𝟗𝟏, 𝟑𝟎𝟎. 𝟎𝟎
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑆𝑃 = $15,000.00
𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝑺𝑷 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟕𝟖𝟏, 𝟎𝟓𝟎. 𝟎𝟎
From Appendix 5,
(l/h)
Excavator 8.87 Maintenance and other 20 %
32.52 Diesel Fuel Cost Php39.40 per
23.96 liter
21.96
17.62
17.29
Wheel 15.07
Loaders 14.59
16.43
14.5
13.96
12.76
Truck 18.67
18.78
22.74
Bulldozer 33.16
Average: 18.93
129 | P a g e
𝑑𝑎𝑦
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑡𝑜 = 20 𝑥 18.93 𝑥 1.2 𝑥 𝑃ℎ𝑝39.40
= 𝑷𝒉𝒑𝟓, 𝟏𝟓𝟓, 𝟐𝟓𝟗. 𝟗𝟎 𝒑𝒆𝒓 𝒚𝒆𝒂𝒓
Tariff: 1%
Years of Completion (n): 5 years
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝐷𝐸𝑃 = $7,000,000.00
𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝑫𝑬𝑷 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟑𝟔𝟒, 𝟒𝟗𝟎, 𝟎𝟎𝟎. 𝟎𝟎
Total Cost

0.95
𝑃ℎ𝑝206,586,186,023.20 + 𝑃ℎ𝑝5,043,827,120.23
+𝑃ℎ𝑝84,996,000,000.00 + 𝑃ℎ𝑝4,769,091,300.00 + 𝑃ℎ𝑝781,050.00
+𝑃ℎ𝑝25,776,299.52 + 𝑃ℎ𝑝364,490,000.00
0.95
𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝑻 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟐𝟐𝟗, 𝟏𝟑𝟐, 𝟓𝟑𝟏, 𝟓𝟐𝟔. 𝟏𝟏
130 | P a g e
4.1.1.3 Third Proposed Location
Volume of dam (Vd)
𝑊𝑑 143,390,967,552.00
𝑉𝑑 = =
𝑑𝑐 135
𝑽𝒅 = 𝟏, 𝟎𝟔𝟐, 𝟏𝟓𝟓, 𝟑𝟏𝟓. 𝟐𝟎 𝒇𝒕³
𝑁𝑏 = = = 𝟒. 𝟓
𝑁𝑏𝑡 = 𝑁𝑏 𝑥 𝑉𝑑 = 4.5 𝑥 1,062,155,315.20
𝑵𝒃𝒕 = 𝟏𝟕𝟕, 𝟎𝟐𝟓, 𝟖𝟖𝟓. 𝟖𝟕 𝑩𝒂𝒈𝒔
𝑉𝑤 = 𝑁𝑏𝑡 𝑥 7.5 = 𝟏𝟑𝟐𝟕𝟔𝟗𝟒𝟏𝟒𝟒 𝒈𝒂𝒍𝒍𝒐𝒏𝒔
1 1
27 3.283
𝑽𝒔𝒂𝒏𝒅 = 𝟏𝟎, 𝟎𝟑𝟑, 𝟑𝟑𝟑. 𝟑𝟑 𝒎³
1 1
𝑉𝑔𝑟𝑎𝑣𝑒𝑙 = 𝑁𝑏 𝑥 𝑉𝑑 𝑥 𝐶 = 4.5 𝑥1,062,155,315.20 𝑥 3 𝑥 𝑥
27 3.283
𝑽𝒈𝒓𝒂𝒗𝒆𝒍 = 𝟏𝟓, 𝟎𝟓𝟎, 𝟎𝟎𝟎. 𝟎𝟎 𝒎³
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑑𝑐 = (𝐶𝑒𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑏𝑎𝑔 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑡 𝑥 𝑁𝑏𝑡) + (𝑆𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑡 𝑥 𝑉𝑠𝑎𝑛𝑑)

𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑑𝑐 = (𝑃ℎ𝑝245.00 𝑥 177,025,885.87) + ( 𝑃ℎ𝑝700.00 𝑥 10,033,333.33) + (𝑃ℎ𝑝700.00 𝑥 15,050,000.00)
131 | P a g e
𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝒅𝒄 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑𝟔𝟎, 𝟗𝟐𝟗, 𝟔𝟕𝟓, 𝟑𝟕𝟎. 𝟔𝟕
𝑉𝑟𝑠𝑡 = 0.015 (𝑉𝑑) = 0.015𝑥1,062,155,315.20
𝑽𝒓𝒔𝒕 = 𝟏𝟓, 𝟗𝟑𝟐, 𝟑𝟐𝟗. 𝟕𝟑𝒇𝒕³ = 𝟒𝟓𝟏, 𝟓𝟎𝟎. 𝟎𝟎𝒎³
𝜋(𝐷𝑟𝑠 3 )(𝐿𝑟𝑠) 𝜋(0.0363 )(12)

𝑉𝑟𝑠 = =
4 4
𝑽𝒓𝒔 = 𝟎. 𝟎𝟏𝟐𝟐𝟏𝟒𝟓𝟏𝟐 𝒎³
𝑉𝑟𝑠𝑡 451,500.00
𝑉𝑟𝑠 0.012214512
𝑵𝑹𝑺𝑻 = 𝟑𝟔, 𝟗𝟔𝟒, 𝟐𝟐𝟔. 𝟕𝟓 = 𝟑𝟔, 𝟗𝟔𝟒, 𝟐𝟐𝟕. 𝟎𝟎𝑺𝒕𝒆𝒆𝒍 𝑩𝒂𝒓𝒔
𝑤(𝐻𝑤) 62.4 (951.2)

𝑃𝐷 = =
2 2
𝑷𝑫 = 𝟐𝟗𝟔𝟕𝟕. 𝟒𝟒𝑷𝒔𝒇 = 𝟐𝟎𝟔. 𝟎𝟗𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝟑𝑷𝒔𝒊 = 𝟏. 𝟒𝟐𝟎𝟓𝟕𝟏𝟗𝟎𝟓𝑴𝒑𝒂
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑠𝑡 = 𝑃ℎ𝑝 1,917.60 𝑥 36,964,227.00
𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝒓𝒔𝒕 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟕𝟎, 𝟖𝟖𝟐, 𝟔𝟎𝟏, 𝟔𝟗𝟓. 𝟐𝟎
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑚𝑐 = 𝑃ℎ𝑝 60,929,675,370.67 + 𝑃ℎ𝑝 70,882,601,695.20
𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝒎𝒄 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟏𝟑𝟏, 𝟖𝟏𝟐, 𝟐𝟕𝟕, 𝟎𝟔𝟓. 𝟖𝟕
132 | P a g e
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑝ℎ = 1.1948 (𝑃0.7634 ) = 1.1948 𝑥 430.7634 𝑥 $1,000,000.00
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑝ℎ = $ 21,100,125.23 = 𝑃ℎ𝑝 1,098,683,520.89
Accuracy: 92%
Interest (i): 9%
Years (n): 10 years
𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑝ℎ = 𝑃ℎ𝑝2,109,472,360.10𝑥1.0910
Manpower Cost
𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝒎𝒑 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟒𝟑, 𝟐𝟎𝟎, 𝟎𝟎𝟎
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑚𝑝 𝑥 393.5 𝑃ℎ𝑝43,200,000 𝑥393.5

12 12
133 | P a g e
Installation Cost
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑠𝑡 = $2.13𝑥43,000,000.00
𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝒊𝒏𝒔𝒕 = $ 𝟗𝟏, 𝟓𝟗𝟎, 𝟎𝟎𝟎. 𝟎𝟎 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟒, 𝟕𝟔𝟗, 𝟎𝟗𝟏, 𝟑𝟎𝟎. 𝟎𝟎
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑆𝑃 = $15,000.00
𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝑺𝑷 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟕𝟖𝟏, 𝟎𝟓𝟎. 𝟎𝟎
From Appendix 5,
(l/h)
Maintenance and other 20 %
Excavator 8.87
32.52 Diesel Fuel Cost Php39.40 per
liter
23.96
21.96
17.62
17.29
Wheel 15.07
Loaders 14.59
16.43
14.5
13.96
12.76
Truck 18.67
18.78
22.74
Bulldozer 33.16
Average: 18.93
𝑑𝑎𝑦
134 | P a g e
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝑡𝑜 = 20 𝑥 18.93 𝑥 1.2 𝑥 𝑃ℎ𝑝39.40
= 𝑷𝒉𝒑𝟓, 𝟏𝟓𝟓, 𝟐𝟓𝟗. 𝟗𝟎 𝒑𝒆𝒓 𝒚𝒆𝒂𝒓
Tariff: 1% (Tariff of Turbine based from http://tariffcommission.gov.ph)

Years of Completion (n): 5 years
𝐶𝑜𝑠𝑡𝐷𝐸𝑃 = $7,000,000.00
𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝑫𝑬𝑷 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟑𝟔𝟒, 𝟒𝟗𝟎, 𝟎𝟎𝟎. 𝟎𝟎
Total Cost

0.95
𝑃ℎ𝑝131,812,277,065.87 + 𝑃ℎ𝑝5,043,827,120.23
+𝑃ℎ𝑝84,996,000,000.00 + 𝑃ℎ𝑝4,769,091,300.00
+𝑃ℎ𝑝781,050.00 + 𝑃ℎ𝑝25,776,299.52 + 𝑃ℎ𝑝364,490,000.00
0.95
𝑪𝒐𝒔𝒕𝑻 = 𝑷𝒉𝒑 𝟐𝟑𝟖, 𝟗𝟔𝟎, 𝟐𝟓𝟓, 𝟔𝟏𝟔. 𝟒𝟒
135 | P a g e
136
Table 4-1: Summary of Cost Analysis
COST ANALYSIS
Location 1 Location 2 Location 3

4.1.1.4 Cost Analysis Per Location
Type of Cost Cost Type of Cost Cost Type of Cost Cost
Material Cost Php122,475,939,180.05 Material Cost Php206,586,186,023.20 Material Cost Php131,812,277,065.87
Powerhouse Eqpt. Cost Php5,043,827,120.23 Powerhouse Eqpt. Cost Php5,043,827,120.23 Powerhouse Eqpt. Cost Php5,043,827,120.23
ECYMR Php84,996,000,000.00 ECYMR Php84,996,000,000.00 ECYMR Php84,996,000,000.00
Installation Cost Php4,769,091,300.00 Installation Cost Php4,769,091,300.00 Installation Cost Php4,769,091,300.00

Site Identification and
Assessment Cost Php781,050.00 Site Identification and Assessment Cost Php781,050.00 Site Identification and Assessment Cost Php781,050.00
Transport and other Cost Php25,776,299.52 Transport and other Cost Php25,776,299.52 Transport and other Cost Php25,776,299.52
Design, Engineering and Project Design, Engineering and Project Design, Engineering and Project
Management Cost Php364,490,000.00 Management Cost Php364,490,000.00 Management Cost Php364,490,000.00
Chapter 4: Design of 43 MW Hydroelectric Power Plant in Oriental Mindoro
Other Cost Php11,456,626,576.31 Other Cost Php15,883,481,673.31 Other Cost Php11,948,012,780.82
Total: Php229,132,531,526.11 Total: Php317,669,633,466.27 Total: Php238,960,255,616.44
136 | P a g e
COST ANALYSIS PER LOCATION

100%
90%
80% Other Cost
70% Design, Engineering and

Project Management Cost
60%
Site Identification and

50% Assessment Cost
Installation Cost
40%
ECYMR
30%
Powerhouse Eqpt. Cost
20% Material Cost
10%
0%
Location 1 Location 2 Location 3
Figure 4-1: Cost Analysis per Location
The figure shown presents the allocation of the costs from the total cost. The biggest
contributor is the material cost while the least is the site identification and assessment cost. The
second biggest contributor of the total cost is the ECYMR (Equivalent Construction Year Minimum
Wage Rate). This includes the salary of the blue-collared jobs. From the analysis of the cost, the
graph and data can be used as a tool for allocating of monetary resources and for planning of
expenditures.
137 | P a g e
4.1.2 Efficiency (Penstock Efficiency)
The efficiency of the penstock in a Hydroelectric power plant will determine the
effectiveness of the design. Also, it will determine the actual head of the designed hydroelectric
power plant per location and from this data, the designers can compare these for the evaluation of
trade-offs. In this constraint, the condition of the project is resolute with the highest efficiency the
Hydro-Electric Power Plant will produce.
4.1.3 Sustainability (Environmental Impact)
In ecology, sustainability is the property of biological systems to remain diverse and

productive indefinitely. Water and landscape impacts are also deliberated. Biodiversity within the
potential area shall be considered. In this constraint, the designers used the net head of the
designed power plants per location for sustainability. The higher the net head, the lower the
sustainability because it will occupy and damage the diversity of the proposed location. Hence, it
shall answer some laws to be abided regarding environmental care and sustainability.
138 | P a g e
4.2 Trade-Offs
The trade-offs in this design are the operational hours as per location, specified as: Design
1 Design 2 and Design 3. Comparison of these three designs by presenting the advantage and
disadvantage, the designers can choose whichever to be the design by the given constraints.
Table 4-2: Summary of Initial Estimated Values

OPERATIONAL HOURS
Constraint DESIGN 1 DESIGN 2 DESIGN 3

AVE: 14 HOURS AVE: 18 HOURS AVE: 16 HOURS
PEAK :10 HOURS PEAK: 6 HOURS PEAK: 8 HOURS
Economic PHP 229 132 531 526.11 PHP 317 669 633 466.27 PHP 238 960 255 616.44
Efficiency 50% 70% 65%
Sustainability 246 m 428 m 191 m
Designer’s Raw Ranking
In order for the designers to have an initial estimate of which of the three design
alternatives for drainage system will satisfy the design constraints, the designer came up into a raw
designer ranking. The designers formulated a ranking for the three trade-offs of the Hydro-Electric
power plant. From this ranking, economic, societal and sustainability constraints will be quantified
which will become the determinant of which of the three the Hydro-Electric power plant design will
govern.
From the following constraints, the designers where able to come up into a Designer’s
Ranking for trade-offs. Three Design drainage system were considered namely Low Head, Medium
Head and Large Head. Using the model on trade-off strategies in engineering design by Otto and
Antonsson (1991), the importance of each criterion (on a scale of 0 to 100, 100 with the highest
importance) was assigned and each design methodology’s ability to satisfy the criterion (on a scale
from 0 to 100, 100 with the highest importance to satisfy the criterion) was likewise tabulated.
(𝐻𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑒𝑟 𝑉𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 − 𝐿𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 𝑉𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒)

%𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 = Equation 1
Higher Value
𝑆𝑢𝑏𝑜𝑟𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑡𝑒 𝑅𝑎𝑛𝑘 = 𝐺𝑜𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑛𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑅𝑎𝑛𝑘 − (%𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒)𝑥 100 Equation 2
The subordinate rank formula in Equation 4.2, it used the variable governing rank in which
it is set by the designer because the governing rank is the subjective part of the designers. The
subordinate rank is also expressed as the distance from the governing rank in the rank scale.
139 | P a g e
Figure 4-2: Ranking Scale for Percent Difference
Figure 4.1 shows the sample ranking scale for percentage difference, it is used to plot the
distance of the subordinate rank from the governing rank using equation 4.2.
(Otto,K.N; Antonson’s, E.K., 1991)
4.2.1 Design Trade-off 1: Economical (Construction Cost)
Economic constraint is significant to prove viability, to obtain solid proofs, and to weight the
costs in constructing, operating, and maintaining a Hydroelectric Power Plant. The results of this
trade off reveal the most economical choice regarding the operational hours as per location.
Table 4-3: Summary of Initial Estimated Costs for Economic Constraints
Initial Estimated Costs
Constraint Hydro Electric Power Plant Trade offs
DESIGN 1 DESIGN 2 DESIGN 3

AVE : 14 HOURS AVE: 18 HOURS AVE: 16 HOURS
PEAK :10 HOURS PEAK: 6 HOURS PEAK: 8 HOURS
Economic PHP 229 132 531 526.11 PHP 317 669 633 466.27 PHP 238 960 255 616.44
Computation of Ranking for Economical Constraint for Design 1 vs. Design 3:
As shown on table 4-2, the designers gave a rank of 10 for Design 1 since it has lowest
costs compared to the other two designs and is used as the governing rank for the computation of
the subordinate rank of Design 3.
Using Equation 4.1:
𝐻𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑒𝑟 𝑉𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒(𝐷𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 3) = 238 960 255 616.44
𝐿𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 𝑉𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒(𝐷𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 1) = 229 132 531 526.11
(238 960 255 616.44 − 229 132 531 526.11)

% 𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 =
238 960 255 616.44
% 𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 = 0.041
The computation above shows the percent difference of Design 1 and Design 3 based on
costs of each design. The higher and lower values were based on the table 4-2, costs of Each
140 | P a g e
Design. These values were used in the computation for the percent difference in equation 4.2
where the formula is higher value subtracted by the lower value. Then, the difference is divided by
the higher value. The quotient, which is, determines the percent difference of the two designs.
Subordinate rank is computed to determine the percent difference between the Design 3
and Design 1. The result is the rank of the better design. The computation for the subordinate rank
is shown below.
Using Equation:
𝑆𝑢𝑏𝑜𝑟𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑡𝑒 𝑅𝑎𝑛𝑘 = 100 − (0.041) × 100
𝑆𝑢𝑏𝑜𝑟𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑡𝑒 𝑅𝑎𝑛𝑘 = 95 ≅ 90
Figure 4-3: Percent Difference of Design 1 and Design 3 for Economic Constraint
As shown in Figure 4.2, the distance shown in the graph between the values 90 and 100
indicates a 10 percent that the Design 1 is higher than Design 3 in terms of the economic
constraint.
Computation of Ranking for Economical Constraint for Design 1 vs. Design 2:
As shown on table 4-2, the designers gave a rank of 10 for Design 1 since it has the lowest
costs compared to the other two designs and is used as the governing rank for the computation of
the subordinate rank of Design 2.
Using Equation 3.1:
𝐻𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑒𝑟 𝑉𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒(𝐷𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 2) = 317 669 633 466.27
𝐿𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 𝑉𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒(𝐷𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 1) = 229 132 531 526.11
(317 669 633 466.27 − 229 132 531 526.11 )

317 669 633 466.27
costs of each design. The higher and lower values were based on the table 4-1, costs of Each
141 | P a g e
is shown below.
Using Equation:
𝑆𝑢𝑏𝑜𝑟𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑡𝑒 𝑅𝑎𝑛𝑘 = 72.13 ≅ 70
Figure 3-4: Percent Difference of Design 1 and Design 2 for Economic Constraint
indicates that the Design 1 is 30% higher than Design 2 in terms of the economic constraint.
Table 4-4: Summary of Final Values with Criterion’s Importance for Economic Constraints
Ability to Satisfy Criterion
Decision Criteria Criterion’s DESIGN 1 DESIGN 2 DESIGN 3

Importance
Economic 10% 100 70 90
4.2.2 Design Trade-off 2: Efficiency (Penstock Efficiency)
The efficiency of penstock of a Hydro-Electric Power Plant, as one of the main

components, contributes greatly on the overall efficiency of the power generating system. High
efficiency system is designed to obtain high quality performance to maximize the potentials and
lessen the waste energy produced.
Table 4-5: Summary of Initial Calculated Efficiencies for Efficiency Constraints
Initial Estimated Penstock Efficiencies
Constraint Hydro Electric Power Plant Trade offs
Efficiency 50% 70% 65%
142 | P a g e
Computation of Ranking for Efficiency Constraint for Design 2 vs. Design 1:
As shown on table 4-5, the designers gave a rank of 10 for Design 2 since it has the
highest efficiency compared to the other two designs and is used as the governing rank for the
computation of the subordinate rank of Design 1.
Using Equation 4.1:
𝐻𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑒𝑟 𝑉𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒(𝐷𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 2) = 70
𝐿𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 𝑉𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒(𝐷𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 1) = 50
(70 − 50)
70
% 𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 = 0. 285
efficiency constraint. The higher and lower values were based on the table 4-4, costs of Each
and Design 1 The result is the rank of the better design. The computation for the subordinate rank
is shown below.
Using Equation:
𝑆𝑢𝑏𝑜𝑟𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑡𝑒 𝑅𝑎𝑛𝑘 = 71.5 ≅ 70
Figure 4-5: Percent Difference of Design 2 and Design 1 for Efficiency Constraint
indicates that the Design 2 is 30% higher than Design 1 in terms of the efficiency constraint.
143 | P a g e
Computation of Ranking for Efficiency Constraint for Design 2 vs. Design 3:
highest efficiency compared to the other two designs and is used as the governing rank for the
Using Equation 4.1
𝐻𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑒𝑟 𝑉𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒(𝐷𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 2) = 70
(70 − 65)
70
% 𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 = 0. 071
efficiency constraint. The higher and lower values were based on the table 4-4, costs of Each
is shown below.
Using Equation:
Figure 4-6: Percent Difference of Design 2 and Design 3 for Efficiency Constraint
indicates that the Design 2 is 10% higher than Design 3 in terms of the efficiency constraint.
144 | P a g e
Table 4-6: Summary of Final Values with Criterion’s Importance for Efficiency Constraints
Decision Criterion’s Ability to Satisfy Criterion

Criteria Importance
Efficiency 70% 70 100 90
4.2.3 Design Trade-off 3: Sustainability (Environmental Impact)
Modern day engineers always take a good look on how the designed mechanism or
system affects the environment. Environmental hazards of a design must be set into minimum - or
must be eliminated if possible. In this design, the head of dam proportional to the area that will be
covered by water is considered to damage the environment due to submerging large portion of
land which serves as habitat of various plants and animals.
Table 4-7: Summary of Initial Estimated Values for Sustainability Constraints
Initial Estimated Heads of Dam
Constraints Hydro Electric Power Plant Trade offs
Sustainability 246 m 428 m 191 m
Computation of Ranking for Sustainability Constraint for Design 3 vs. Design 1:
As shown on table 4-6, the designers gave a rank of 10 for Design 3 since it has the lowest
head that means highest sustainability compared to the other two designs and is used as the
governing rank for the computation of the subordinate rank of Design 1.
Using Equation 4.1:
𝐻𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑒𝑟 𝑉𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒(Design 1) = 246
(246 − 191)
246
sustainability constraint. The higher and lower values were based on the table 4-6, costs of Each
145 | P a g e
is shown below.
Using Equation:
Subordinate Rank = 77.6 ≅ 80
Figure 4-7: Percent Difference of Design 3 and Design 1 for Sustainability Constraint
indicates that the Design 3 is 20% higher than Design 1 in terms of the sustainability constraint.
Computation of Ranking for Sustainability Constraint for Design 3 vs. Design 2:
highest sustainability compared to the other two designs and is used as the governing rank for the
Using Equation 4.1:
𝐻𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑒𝑟 𝑉𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒(Design 2 ) = 428
𝐿𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 𝑉𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒(Design 3) = 191
(428 − 191 )
428
sustainability constraint. The higher and lower values were based on the table 4.6, costs of Each
146 | P a g e
is shown below.
Using Equation:
Figure 4-8: Percent Difference of Design 2 and Design 3 for Sustainability Constraint
indicates that the Design 3 is 50% higher than Design 2 in terms of the sustainability constraint.
Table 4-8: Summary of Final Values with Criterion’s Importance for Sustainability Constraints
Ability to Satisfy Criterion
Decision Criterion’s
Criteria Importance
Sustainability 10% 80 50 100
After considering the design constraints, the designers came up with the initial rankings.
The discussion on how the designers came up with the raw rankings values are shown and
computed below.
Table 4-9: Designers Raw Ranking for the Three Designs
ABILITY TO SATISFY THE CRITERION
DECISION CRITERION’S (on a scale from 0 to 100)

CRITERIA IMPORTANCE
ECONOMICAL 10% 100 70 90
EFFICIENCY 70% 70 100 90
SUSTAINABILITY 20% 80 50 100
OVER-ALL RANK 100 % 75 87 92

(Otto,K.N; Antonson’s, E.K., 1991)
147 | P a g e
4.3 Sensitivity Analysis
Sensitivity analysis shows how the ambiguity in the output of a mathematical model or
system can be assigned to contrasting sources of uncertainty in its inputs.
When the ranking value for each criterion are very close to one another, uncertainties will
occur because it will be harder for the designers to determine the most appropriate design that
needs to be implemented. However, if the ranking value for each constraint has a large difference,
the determination of the governing design will be easier.
The scores from the computation of ranking for each design is shown in table 4-7. By
interchanging the values of the importance of constraints set by the designers, as shown in table 4-
7, the raw rankings for the three designs can be repeatedly calculated. The results of the repeated
computations are shown in table 4-5.
Table 4-10: Scores from the Computation of Ranking for each design
Decision Criteria Design 1 Design 2 Design 3
Economical 100 70 90
Efficiency 70 100 90
Sustainability 80 50 100
Table 4-5 contains the tabulated scores for the three designs. The design that is set as
governing rank is given a score of 5. The governing rank in terms of economical constraint was
given to Design 1 for having the lowest costs among the three designs. The Design 2 has the
governing rank in terms of performance for having the widest. Lastly, Design 3 was given the
governing rank in terms of quality for having.
Table 4-11: Interchanged Values of Importance of Constraints set by the designers
Criterion’s Importance 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th
Criterion Importance (Economical) 10% 20% 70% 20% 70% 10%

Criterion Importance (Efficiency) 70% 70% 20% 10% 10% 20%
Criterion Importance (Sustainability) 20% 10% 10% 70% 20% 70%
Table 4-6 has the interchanged values of importance of constraints set by the designers.
The most important criterion was set to 10, while the lowest importance was given a score of 8. By
interchanging the priority of the constraints, the designers were able to repeatedly perform the
calculations for getting the raw rankings for the three designs. The best design will be determined
by counting the number of times a design can win over the other designs in terms of the computed
raw rankings.
148 | P a g e
Table 4-12: Results for Repeated Computation of Raw Rankings

Overall Rank 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th
Design 1 Raw Rankings 75 77 92 83 93 80
Table 4-11 has the tabulated results for repeated computation of raw rankings. It shows
that the computation results really vary depending on what constraint the designers prioritized. In
the first result, the Design 3 rose on top with a raw ranking value of 92. The second result shows
that Design 3 won against the other designs with a raw ranking value of 91. The third result
indicates that the best design should be Design 1 for having the same highest raw ranking of 92.
The fourth result tells that Design 3 may still be the best design for having the raw ranking of 97.
The fifth result shows that Design 1 is better than the other designs for having a raw ranking of 93.
Lastly, the sixth result determines that Design 3 should be the best design to be used application
for the raw ranking of 97. It shows that the Design 3 comes on top of the other designs in the first,
second, third, and fifth results. By counting the number of times, a design wins against the others, it
comes out that Design 3 is the most favored by the computation results. Therefore, Design 3 is the
best design that the designers must implement.
A column graph is a chart which shows data as a series of information points coined as
'markers' linked by straight line sections. It is a basic type of chart common in many fields. The
Column graph representation of the Sensitivity Analysis is shown in figure 4.9. The Design 1
results are represented as a blue-colored line, the Design 2 results as an orange-colored line, and
the Design 3 results as a green-colored line. It shows that the Design 3 comes on top of the other
designs in the first, second, fourth and sixth results. Therefore, Design 3 is the best for the power
plant design, having the most number of times being favored by the calculation results.
149 | P a g e
Sensitivity Analysis
120
100
97 97
92 92 93 92
91 91
89
87
80 83
80
77
75 74
69
60
62
59
40
20
0
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th
Design 1 Design 2 Design 3
Figure 4-9: Column Graph Representation of Sensitivity Analysis
150 | P a g e
4.4 Design Standards
Standards are rules or principles that is used as a basis for judgement. In this case, the
judgement shall be the assumptions for the design of each component of a hydroelectric power
plant. Standards maintain the quality of the designs by following internationally-accepted rules and
principles.
Planning and Design of Hydro-Electric Power Plants (G. Gedeon, P.E. et. al., 1995)
Chapter 1
Introduction
1-1. Purpose and Scope
The hydroelectric power plant standards address the discussion of the general, architectural and
structural considerations applicable to the design. It is intended for the guidance of those elements
responsible for the planning and design of such structures. It should also be used in establishing
minimum criteria for the addition of hydro-power facilities and for the design of each components at
existing Corps of Engineers projects, whether by Corps of Engineers or a non-Federal developer.
Standards protect the event of failure that will damage not only in power plant but also to the
civilians depending on its stability.
1-2. Applicability
This manual applies to HQUSACE elements, major subordinate commands, districts, laboratories,
and field operating activities having responsibility for design of civil works projects.
1-3. References
Required and related publications are listed in Appendix A.
1-4. Codes
Portions of the codes, standards, or requirements published by the associations or agencies listed
below are applicable to the work.
a. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).
b. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
c. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE).
d. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
e. National Board of Fire Underwriters (NBFU).

151 | P a g e
f. National Bureau of Standards (NBS).
g. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
h. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
1-5. Criteria
The design methods, assumptions, allowable stresses, criteria, typical details, and other provisions
covered in this manual should be followed wherever practicable. However, it is expected that
judgement and discretion will be used in applying the material contained herein. It is realized that
departures from these standards may be necessary in some cases in order to meet the special
requirements and conditions of the work under consideration. When alternate methods,
procedures, and types of equipment are investigated, final selection should not be made solely on
first cost but should be based on obtaining overall economy and security by giving appropriate
weight to reliability of service, case of maintenance, and ability to restore service within a short time
in event of blast damage or radiological contamination. Whether architect-engineers or
Hydroelectric Design Center personnel design the power plant, the criteria and instructions set out
in Appendix A of guide specification CE-4000 should be followed.
1-6. Hydroelectric Design Center
a. Utilizing installations. The engineering of hydroelectric projects is a highly specialized field,

particularly the engineering design and operational activities. In order to assist field
operating activities (FOA), the Corps of Engineers has established a Hydroelectric Design
Center (HDC), located at Portland, Oregon, for utilization for all hydroelectric installations
at existing dams.
b. FOA services. The FOA will retain complete responsibility and authority for the work,
including funding, inspection, testing, contract management, and administration. The HDC
will perform the following engineering and design services in accordance with ER 1110-2-
109:
(1) Provide the technical portions of reconnaissance reports and other pre-authorization
studies for inclusion by the requesting FOA in the overall report.
(2) Provide the architectural, structural, electrical, and mechanical design for the
powerhouse including switchyards, related facilities, and all hydraulic transient studies.
(3) Prepare preliminary design reports and the feature design memoranda for
hydroelectric power plants for the requesting FOA.
(4) Prepare plans and specifications for supply and construction contracts and
supplemental major equipment testing contracts.
(5) Provide technical review of shop drawings.
152 | P a g e
(6) Provide technical assistance to the Contracting Officer’s representative at model and
field tests. The HDC will analyze results and make recommendations.
(7) Assist in preparation of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
(8) Provide necessary engineering and drafting to transfer “as-built” changes to “record”
tracings and ensure complete coordination of such changes.
(9) Participate in review of plans and specification for non-federal development at Corps
of Engineers projects in accordance with ER 1110-2-1454.
Chapter 2
General Requirements
2-1. Location of Powerhouse
a. Determining location. The location of the powerhouse is determined by the overall project
development. The factors affecting the location include:
(1) Location of the spillway (when powerhouse is located adjacent to the dam).
(2) Location of navigation locks (on navigation projects).
(3) Foundation conditions.
(4) Valley width.
(5) River channel conditions below dam.
(6) Accessibility.
(7) Location of switchyard and transmission lines.
b. Local conditions. At projects where the powerhouse is located at the dam adjacent to the
spillway, local condition such as width of flood plain, accessibility, and depth of foundations
will usually govern the location. On projects which will include a navigation lock, the
powerhouse is preferably located at the opposite end of the spillway from the lock. Where
the river channel below the dam has an appreciable fall, economic studies should be made
to determine whether a remote powerhouse location downstream from the dam is
justifiable.
c. Sub-structures. At low-head projects, the sub-structure of the powerhouse may be wholly

or partially incorporated into the design of the intake structure. At medium-head plants, the
substructures of the generating units and the upstream generator room wall should be
separated from the toe of a concrete dam, and any part of the powerhouse supported
thereon, by a formed joint. See paragraph 4.7 for additional joint details. The amount of
153 | P a g e
separation between the powerhouse substructure and the toe of the dam at, or below, te
elevation of the generator room floor may be dependent upon the foundation conditions,
but the separation is frequently as much as 10 feet or more to provide adequate space to
install service facilities.
2-2. Location of Switchyard
The availability of suitable space will, in a great many cases, determine the location of the
switchyard. Consideration should be given to the number and direction of outgoing transmission
lines. The elevation of the switchyard should be established above design high tailwater. The most
desirable and economical location is usually adjacent to or near the powerhouse.
2-3. Highway and Railroad Access
In planning the development of the site, both highway and railroad access to the powerhouse,
switchyard, and other structures should be considered. Highway access to the plant should usually
be provided. At plants where large generating units are to be installed, an access railroad should
be considered if feasible and economically justified, consideration being given to utilizing the
railroad connection which will usually be required for construction of the dam. Trucking costs from
the nearest rail point, together with all handling costs should be compared with the cost of
constructing and maintaining a railroad to the plant. The location of the highway or railroad access
into the powerhouse will be determined by the approach conditions in the valley and the
arrangement of the powerhouse. The access facilities should, where possible, be located so that
their use will not be impaired by design high water. It is not essential that the railroad entrance be
located above high water, especially where the flooding period would be of short duration;
however, provision for bulkheading of the railroad entrance should be provided, and an access
protected from the design high-water conditions should ne provided for personnel.
2-4. Other Site Features
Area should be provided for both public and employee parking. Sidewalks, guard rails, fences,
locked gates. Parapets. And other safety features should be included in the general plan. Adequate
drainage, a water supply, and lighting should be provided in the areas near the powerhouse.
Landscaping should also be considered in the studies of the site development.
2-5. Types of Powerhouse Structures
Three types of powerhouses classified as to method of housing the main generating units are
described:
a. Indoor type. The generator room is fully enclosed and of sufficient height to permit transfer
of equipment by means of an indoor crane.
b. Semi-outdoor type. The generator room is fully enclosed but the main hoisting and transfer
equipment is a gantry located on the roof of the plant and equipment is handled through hatches.
154 | P a g e
c. Outdoor type. In this type there is no generator room and the generators are housed in
individual cubicles or enclosures on, or recessed in, the deck.
2-6. Selection of Type of Powerhouse
This determination will be made on the basis of an economic analysis which takes into
consideration, not only first cost, but operation and maintenance costs. While there is some
structural economy inherent in outdoor and semi-outdoor plants, it does not necessarily offset
increased equipment costs. An outdoor type of plant may be competitive with an indoor type at a
site having low maximum tailwater and where the number of generating units to be provided is
sufficient to minimize increased crane costs. The structural economy of a semi-outdoor plant is
marginal since the only saving is in wall height, while the roof, which is actually the working deck,
must generally sustain higher live loads. It is emphasized, however, that selection of type, for any
given site, can only be made after a thorough study.
2-7. General Arrangement of Powerhouse
In general, a powerhouse may be divided into three areas: the main powerhouse structure, housing
the generating units and having either separate or combined generator and turbine room, erection
bay, and service areas.
Main powerhouse structure. The generator room is the main feature of the powerhouse about
which other areas are grouped. It is divided into bays or blocks with one generating unit normally
located in each block. The width (upstream-downstream dimensions) of the genera-tor room for the
indoor type should provide for a passageway or aisle with a minimum width of 10 feet between the
generators and one powerhouse wall. The height of the generator room is governed by the maxi-
mum clearance height required for dismantling and/or moving major items of equipment, such as
parts of generators and turbines; location of the crane rails due to erection bay requirements; the
crane clearance requirements; and the type of roof framing. All clearances should be adequate to
provide convenient working space but should not be excessive. The elevation of the turbine room
floor should be established so as to provide a mini-mum requirement of 3 feet of concrete over a
steel spiral case, or a minimum roof thickness of 4 feet for a semi-spiral concrete case. In
establishing the distance between the generator and turbine room floors, if they are not combined,
the size of equipment to be handled in the turbine room, the head room between platforms in the
turbine pit, and the generator room floor construction should be considered.
b. Erection bay. In general, the erection bay should be located at the end of the generator
room, preferably at the same floor elevation and with a length equal to at least one generator bay.
The above length should be increased sufficiently to provide adequate working room if railroad
access is provided into the erection bay at right angles to the axis of the powerhouse; however, no
additional space should be required if the access railroad enters from the end of the powerhouse.
In cases where the elevation of the crane rail would be dependent on the requirement that a
transformer with bushings in place be brought under the crane girder, consideration should be
given to the possible advantages of revising the layout to permit bringing the transformer in at the
end of the structure, at the end of the generator room, if the generator room is at a lower elevation
than the erection bay, or removing bushings before moving transformer into powerhouse. If the
155 | P a g e
height required for untanking a trans-former appears to be the controlling dimension, a study
should be made of the economy of installing a hatchway and pit in the erection bay floor to provide
the required height.
c. Service area. Service areas include offices, control and testing rooms, storage rooms,
maintenance shop, auxiliary equipment rooms, and other rooms for special uses. For plants
located at the toes of gravity dams, the space available between the generator room and the face
of the dam is a logical location for most of the features enumerated above. However, in all cases
an economic study, which should include the cost of any added length of penstock required, should
be made before deciding to increase the space between the dam and powerhouse to
accommodate these features. The offices are frequently located on upper floors, and the control
room and other service rooms on lower floors. The most advantageous location for the
maintenance shop is usually at the generator room floor level.
d. Space allocations. Space should be provided for some or all of the following features and
uses, as required:
(1) Public areas: main public entrance, reception area, public rest rooms, exhibits, and
elevator.
(2) Employee areas: employee entrance, equipment entrance, offices, office storage, rest
rooms for office use, control room, rest rooms for control room operators, kitchen for control room
operators, repair and test room for instruments, main generator rooms, main turbine rooms, station
service or fish water units area, erection and/or service areas.
(3) Shops: machine, electrical, electronic, pipe, welding, sheet metal, carpenter, and paint with
spray booth.
(4) Storage and miscellaneous areas: storage battery and battery charger rooms, cable
galleries, cable spreading room under control room, telephone and carrier current equipment room,
oil storage tank room, oil purification room, storage for paints and miscellaneous lubricants, storage
rooms, locker rooms with showers and toilet facilities, first aid room, lunch room with kitchen
facilities, elevator, heating, ventilation, and air conditioning equipment rooms, and auxiliary
equipment rooms.
2-8. Location of Main Power Transformers
The choice of location of the main power transformers is inter-related with the selection of the type
and rating of
the transformers. The selection of single-phase or 3-phase type of transformers, the method of
cooling, and the kVA rating are also directly related to the basic switching provisions selected for
the plant, the number and rating of generators associated with each transformer or transformer
bank, and the location of the transformers. In order to determine the most suitable and economical
installation, including the type, rating, and location of the main power transformers, adequate
156 | P a g e
studies, including comparative estimates of total installed first cost and total annual cost for each
scheme studied, should be made during the preliminary design stage along with studies to
determine the basic switching arrangement and general arrangement of the powerplant. Locations
at which the main power transformers may be placed are: between the powerhouse and dam, on
the draft tube deck, in the switchyard, and near the powerhouse but not in the switchyard. From the
viewpoint of electrical efficiency, the power connections between the generators and trans-formers
should be as short as practicable. This consideration favors the location of the transformers at or
near the powerhouse. In deciding between the upstream or downstream location at the
powerhouse, consideration should be given to the location of the switchyard and the nature of the
high-voltage connections between it and the transformers. In some cases, the location of the trans-
formers on the draft tube deck may increase the cost of the powerhouse structure. However, if
such a location makes possible a direct overhead connection to the switchyard, this feature may
more than balance any increased cost of the structure. At small plants and, where the switchyard
can be located close to the power-house, a transformer location in the switchyard may be
economical. Where transformers are located between the powerhouse and dam, special high-
voltage cable connections to the switchyard may be required. In selecting the location for the
transformers, as well as in planning the general plant arrangement, consideration should be given
to the requirements for transporting and untanking the transformers.
2-9. Powerhouse and Switchyard Equipment
The connection between items of equipment in the powerhouse and switchyard will require special
study in each individual case. The connections fall into three classes described below:
a. Main power connections. In general, when the main power transformers are located in the
switchyard, the main power connections between the powerhouse and switchyard should be
carried in an underground tunnel or duct bank. When the transformers are at the power-house,
consideration should be given to the economy and advantages of overhead connections.
b. Control cables and power supply to switchyard. The number and types of these
connections require that they be run underground. For best protection from dampness and for ease
of inspection and replacement, a cable tunnel is usually justifiable in major plants. In small plants,
the cables are sometimes run in conduits or duct banks from the powerhouse to a distributing point
in the switchyard.
c. Oil piping. It is desirable to concentrate oil purification operations and oil storage in the
powerhouse. This concentration requires connections between the switchyard and powerhouse for
both clean and dirty insulating oil. If a tunnel is required for electrical connections, these pipes can
be run in the same tunnel; otherwise, they must be buried underground. If the switchyard is some
distance from the powerhouse, a separate oil purification and storage system may be more
economical. Oil piping or tanks buried underground must meet local, state, and Federal regulations
for environmental protection.
d. Drains. Any drains that may handle a mixture of oil and water should be connected to an
oil/water separator.
157 | P a g e
2-10. Powerhouse Auxiliary Equipment
In planning the general arrangement of the powerhouse, space must be assigned in all of the
auxiliary electrical and mechanical equipment that will be required. The location of the auxiliary
equipment must also be considered with respect to the location of the main equipment with which it
is associated. The following is a list of auxiliary equipment and systems usually required for
powerplants. It is not expected that all items listed will be incorporated in all plants. The size,
service, and general requirements of the plant will usually determine which items are necessary:
water supply systems for raw, treated, and cooling water, unwatering systems, insulating and
lubricating oil transfer, storage and purifications systems, compressed air systems, turbine
governing equipment, fire protection, detection and annunciation, heating, ventilating, and air
conditioning systems, turbine flow meters, water level transmitters and recorders, elevators, main
generator excitation equipment, station service power generating units, station service
transformers and switchgear, main unit control boards, station service control boards, storage
battery and chargers, inverter, electronic equipment (carrier current micro-wave), telephone and
code call system, maintenance shop equipment, sewage disposal equipment, auxiliary equipment
for oil-filled or gas-filled cables, emergency engine-driven generator, incinerator, station drainage
system, generator voltage switchgear, metal-enclosed buses, and surge protection equipment, air
receivers for draft tube water depressing system, heating, ventilation and air conditioning
switchgear, lighting transformers and switchgear, unit auxiliary power centers, electrical shop,
transformer oil pumps and heat exchangers (when located remote from the transformers), and
generator neutral grounding equipment and switchgear.
Chapter 3
Architectural Requirements
3-1. Exterior Design
a. The importance. Exterior design should be considered throughout the design process. In
general, the design should receive most attention once the general arrangement of the
powerhouse including floor and crane rail elevations and crane clearances is determined. It should
utilize scale, proportion, rhythm, and composition to achieve an aesthetically pleasing structure
which fits in with its natural surroundings. In achieving these ends economy is important, and,
although decoration and complexity are not to be ruled out, simplicity should be the keynote.
b. Aesthetic appearance. The arrangement and dimensions of the various masses is

determined by the physical requirements of the powerhouse components. However, in the design
of the ensemble of these masses, the architect should be allowed freedom consistent with an
efficient and economical plant layout. In addition, some of the devices that may be used to define
and com-pose the masses and give scale, proportion, and rhythm are changes in texture and
materials, emphasis of horizontal pour joints and vertical contraction joints, and placement and
sizing of fenestration and openings. The exact size and location of openings should be determined
from the standpoint of aesthetics after the structural, mechanical, and functional requirements have
been investigated. Windows need not be used, but they may be desirable in order to let in natural
158 | P a g e
light and increase employee morale. When used, their form and location should relate to their
function and the aesthetic appearance of the structure. In general, large glass areas in operating
portions of the powerhouse should be avoided to minimize blast damage, but small windows high
in the powerhouse walls may have value in this respect as blast pressure relief openings.
c. Final selection. Selection of the final powerhouse design should be made after a careful
study of at least three designs having basically different exterior treatments. Each proposed design
should be carefully developed and perspective drawings prepared. The point of vision for the
perspectives should be a point from which the general public will view the structure. The sketches,
which are to be used for the selection of exterior treatment, should include all of the adjacent
structures and surroundings.
3-2. Exterior Details
Exterior details are discussed in the following subparagraphs.
a. Roofing. Powerhouse roofs may be pitched (gabled, hipped, vaulted, etc.) or flat (pitch not
greater than 1 inch per foot nor flatter than 1/2 inch per foot). Pitched roofs are preferred because
of lower maintenance costs (flat roofs must be waterproof, whereas pitched roofs need only be
watershedding). Parapets that meet current safety codes should be provided at all roof edges.
Cants should be provided at the intersection of roof and all vertical surfaces in order to eliminate
sharp angles in the roofing. In designing the roofing system, i.e. insulation, roofing, flashing, and
expansion joint covers, the most current roofing technology should be utilized. Whenever roofs are
exposed to public view from the top of the dam or the abutments, special materials may be used
for appearance, e.g. marble chips in place of gravel surfacing.
b. Decks. Exterior concrete decks covering interior spaces should be of watertight

construction. Where the deck is covering habitable areas, or areas containing equipment which
could be damaged by water, a water-proof membrane with concrete topping shall be added to the
structural slab.
c. Walls. Due to structural considerations, e.g. the usual necessity to support crane rails, and
the fact that concrete is the main material used in powerhouse construction, concrete is the most
commonly used material for the exterior walls of superstructure. However, other systems such as
prefabricated insulated aluminum or stainless-steel wall panels, concrete masonry, brick, etc. may
be used provided an overall economy is effected. Concrete should always be used below
maximum powerhouse design tailwater elevation. The finish of the exterior surface of powerhouse
superstructures is discussed in paragraph 4-14b. All details for concrete construction such as
joints, rustication, V-grooves, corner chamfers, and fillets should be studied and considered in the
architectural design. The V-grooves, where required should not be less than 1 inch across the face
and 1/2-inch deep. The angle at the bottom of the V-grooves should be about 90 degrees. All
contraction joints in the substructure should be continued through the superstructure and
considered in the design, regardless of the material used for the walls. Wall panels should not be
laid continuously across such joints. Flashings or waterstops should be used in all exterior vertical
contraction joints.
159 | P a g e
Flashing, jamb closures, corner plates, parapet and eave closure plates for insulated metal walls
should be of the same material and the same gage as specified for exterior wall plates.
d. Entrances. Entrances should conform to OSHA requirements. Not only should all entrances
be located for proper and efficient operation of the plant, but they also should be placed to obtain a
pleasing exterior architectural design. The dimensions of the door openings should be governed by
the required use and should not be sized for the exterior appearance alone. Doors required for
proper operation of the plant should not be of monumental type but should give the impression that
the doors are for plant operation. The public entrance may be more decorative than other plant
doorways and, if desired, may be massive when used as a design feature. Doors of structural glass
or of glass and aluminum are recommended for public entrances. Large doors should either be
hinged at the sides and supported at the top by a trolley for folding-door operation or should be of
the motor-operated, vertical-lift or overhead rolling doors type where clearances are adequate and
where considered desirable from an operation standpoint. A pilot door should be provided in any
large door, when a small entrance door is not nearby.
e. Fenestration. The openings in the exterior walls of the generator room should be confined to
the necessary access doors and to ventilation louvers or small windows above the crane rails. All
sash, trim, or exposed exterior metal should be of aluminum or corrosion-resisting metal requiring
no painting and, in general, should be detailed for standard manufactured products. The use of
specially designed sash and trim should be limited to the public entrance. When the main
transformers are to be located close to the powerhouse wall on either the upstream or downstream
decks, no windows should be planned in the adjacent portion of the wall. Where possible, the use
of windows in office areas and lunch rooms is encouraged. They should be operable for ventilation
and easy to clean such as tilt-turn windows. Glazing should generally be insulating glass. Full-
length glass doors and sidelights should be glazed with tempered glass. In certain cases, where
the admission of light is desired but a clear view is not necessary, the use of double skin insulating
plastics may be considered. Wire glass and glass block will give security and light blast protection.
Glass block may be used as a design element.
Draft tube deck. The draft tube deck should be wide enough to provide safe clearances for
operating the gantry crane, painting and repairing the crane and gates, and removing and
reinstalling the gratings. Hose bibbs of the nonfreeze type should be recessed in the wall of the
powerhouse. A concrete parapet, with or without a pipe handrailing on top, should be provided on
the down-stream side of the deck and should have an overall height above the deck of three and
one-half feet or as required by current safety codes. The design of the lighting system for the draft
tube deck may include provisions in the parapet to accommodate lighting fixtures. Drainage lines
from the deck should be as short and direct as possible, but the outlets should be concealed. To
avoid a tripping hazard, crane rails should be installed in blockouts with the top of the rail
approximately flush with the deck. Blockout should be partially filled with non-shrink grout, and the
top remainder of the recess filled with a two-component, cold-applied, self leveling type sealant.
The thickness of the sealant is determined by the compressive space required for the crane wheel
flange depth.
160 | P a g e
g. Stairs and railings. Exterior stairs should be provided with safety treads made of a material
that will not rust or require painting and may consist of abrasive material troweled into the finish or
abrasive strips embedded in the tread and nosing. Handrailings should be made of concrete,
concrete and metal, or metal only. The metal railings should be treated or a material specified so
that maintenance painting will not be required. All railings should be designed to comply with the
most current safety codes.
h. Skylights. Skylights can present leakage and maintenance problems and should therefore be
limited to use in visitor's areas where a special effect is desired. The framing should be aluminum
or corrosion-resisting metal. They should be glazed with insulating glass or double-skin insulating
plastic. Insulating glass should consist of a top layer of tempered glass and a bottom layer of
laminated safety glass or as required by current local codes.
3-3. Interior Design
Interior details are discussed in the following subparagraphs.
Visitor's facilities. All attended power plants will normally be provided with limited space for the
visiting public. This space should be kept to the minimum required for the estimated attendance.
The items mentioned in the following paragraphs should be considered in planning the public
spaces for all power plants. The public entrance for small plants may be combined with the
employee entrance, and when so located it should be properly marked as a visitors' entrance. For
larger plants, a separate, prominently located visitors' entrance should be provided. The entrance
to the visitors' area should be as direct as possible from the avenue of public approach and should
be accessible to handicapped visitors. An entry vestibule is desirable, but not essential. The design
of the visitors' area should take into consideration provisions for exhibits, and location of drinking
fountains, public toilet rooms, and vertical transportation, e.g. elevators for handicapped access.
The visitors' areas should be arranged so that they are isolated from all other parts of the plant
except for access through locked doors. The room finishes should be attractive, service-able, and
easily maintained. Some of the materials that should be considered for use are terrazzo, ceramic
and quarry tiles, plaster coated with a durable enamel paint, acoustical tile ceilings, etc. Each
material should be evaluated on the basis of cost, appearance, durability, and ease of
maintenance.
b. Control room facilities. The control room space should be planned for the ultimate
development of the powerhouse, regardless of the number of units installed initially. The control
room should be planned for convenience in operation and the equipment should be spaced to
permit easy circulation, easy access to equipment for repair or replacement, and convenient
installation of future equipment. A minimum space of 4 feet should be provided between the
switchboards and the walls and between switchboards and other major equipment. Doors or
removable panels of adequate size should be provided to accommodate the installation of
future switchboard panels. Items such as specially designed operator's desks, control consoles,
and key and map cases should be considered in planning the control room.
(1) Rooms which should be provided as auxiliaries of the control room at attended power
plants usually include a small kitchen, a toilet, a supply room, and a clothes closet. These rooms
161 | P a g e
should be directly accessible to the operators without the use of hallways. The toilet room should
contain one water closet and a lavatory complete with necessary accessories. The supply room
should include shelving for storage of forms and supplies used by the operators. The clothes closet
should have a hat shelf and clothes rod.
The control room floor may be carpeted or have resilient floor covering such as rubber or vinyl-
plastic tile. The walls should be smooth, e.g. plaster or sheet-rock, and painted. The ceiling should
be suspended acoustical tile. Special thought should be given to sound control. Sound-absorbing
wall panels should be considered. They should be covered with perforated vinyl for ease of
maintenance. Windows between the control room and the main powerhouse area should have
insulated glazing and sound absorbing insulation in the frame. The control room will usually have
special lighting, carefully placed to prevent annoying reflections on the instrument panel glass.
(3) The toilet should have ceramic tile floor and walls and painted plaster ceiling. The other
small rooms should have the same floor covering as the control room and should have painted
plaster or gypsum wallboard walls and ceilings. Cove bases of rubber, vinyl, or ceramic tile should
be used in all of the rooms. In some plants, an instrument and relay testing room and a tele-phone
and electronic equipment room may be required. Such rooms should be located near the control
room. A photographic darkroom should also be provided in this area for plants using oscillographic
equipment. In the darkroom, there should be a stainless-steel sink and drainboard for developing
and washing films, storage space for developing apparatus, and a storage cabinet for films. A
workbench with the necessary electrical connections and a storage cabinet or closest should be
pro-vided in the instrument and relay test room. The telephone and electronic equipment room
should also be located convenient to the control room and preferably should be above maximum
design tailwater elevation. This room must be kept clean and free from dust and should be located
with this in mind.
c. Generator room and auxiliary spaces. The arrangement of the rooms and spaces that will
house the electrical and mechanical equipment essential to the operation and maintenance of the
plant should be deter-mined on the basis of an over-all study of the requirements of the functions
involved. A workable, convenient, economical arrangement should be developed that is structurally
and architecturally sound.
The criteria governing the layout of the generator room are given in paragraph 2-7a. A sufficient
amount may be added to the minimum clearances required for installation, operation, repair, and
overhaul to secure reasonably convenient space for carrying out these functions. It is not intended
that clearances and operating spaces should be arbitrarily overdesigned, but reasonable operating
convenience should not be sacrificed in order to secure minimum cost. The space allotment for the
erection bay is discussed in paragraph 2-7b. As the erection bay is merely an extension of the
generator room, the entire space should be treated architecturally as one room. In general, the
treatment should be as simple as possible. The floor finish selected should be the economic one
for the plant under consideration. It should be one that will not dust, will resist damage during minor
repairs to equipment, and can be satisfactorily repaired if accidentally damaged. Also, a finish shall
be used that will clean easily and will not deteriorate with frequent cleaning. Terrazzo is usually
justified due to its extreme durability, ease of maintenance, and attractive appearance. In certain
162 | P a g e
cases, a wainscot of ceramic tile or some other material may be justified, however, concrete walls
are usually sufficient. Concrete walls and ceiling should be painted or sealed to prevent dusting.
Special consideration should be given to the design of the roof framing, as well as any ventilation
duct work and piping that must be carried under the roof, in order to obtain as pleasing an
appearance as possible.
(2) The allotment of space for a maintenance shop should be determined from a layout of the
equipment considered necessary to maintain the plant. This room should be located on the
generator room floor level and should adjoin the erection bay if possible. The ceiling height should
be adequate to provide for the use of a small overhead crane for handling equipment being
repaired. The capacity of the crane must be determined by the weight of equipment to be handled.
Where partitions form a wall of this room, the partition should be of concrete or concrete masonry
units. Partition and walls may be painted or sealed.
(3) The general arrangement of auxiliary equipment is usually determined in making the basic
plant layout. An economical and convenient arrangement of this equipment may be achieved only
by thorough study of all the requirements and by careful coordination of the various systems. The
auxiliary equipment and services for which space will usually be required are listed under
paragraph 2-10.
(a) The spaces allotted for the electrical shop, for sewage disposal, and for oil purification and
storage should be enclosed; but it is not essential that separate rooms be provided for all of the
other functions. In many cases, open bays housing several functions will be practicable, and such
an arrangement will usually be more economical than a layout that provides separate rooms for
each function.
Storage battery and charging rooms shall be designed to conform to Corps, OSHA, and NEC
safety codes. Storage battery and battery charging rooms preferably should be located above high
tailwater elevation and should be adequately ventilated. A sink con-structed of acid-resistant
material should be provided in the battery room. Drainage from the sink and floor drains should
flow to an acid neutralization tank, then discharge to the sewer system. All piping to the
neutralization tank and floor drain, including the drains themselves, should be acid resistant. The
walls and floor of this room should be painted with an acid-resistant enamel. The ceiling may be
painted to improve lighting conditions if desired. Access to the rooms should be adequate for easy
installation and replacement of equipment.
(c) The floors of the oil purification and storage rooms should be trowel- finished concrete,
painted with oil-resistant paint or sealed. The lower 6 feet of the walls should have an oil-resistant
painted dado, with the walls above the dado and the ceiling unpainted. All other rooms should
receive no special finishes.
d. Personnel facilities. Employee facilities required for efficient plant operation should be based
upon approved design memorandum on plant staffing. These facilities usually include the offices,
toilet, shower, locker rooms, employees' lunchroom, stairways, corridors, and elevator. In the larger
163 | P a g e
plants, it is usually necessary to provide a conference room suitable for employee management
meetings.
(1) The requirements for office space will probably vary with each plant, but at all attended
powerplants it is recommended that offices be provided for the plant superintendent and for
general clerical space. The requirements of each plant should govern the allotment of additional
space for offices, and the expected operating organization must be determined before the planning
can be completed. A fireproof vault, file and record rooms, storage closets, and clothes closets
should be provided as required and should be conveniently located with respect to the offices.
Plants should provide toilet rooms for both male and female employees in the office area. The
minimum requirements for the men's toilet should be one water closet, one urinal, and one
lavatory; and for the women's toilet, the requirements should be one water closet and one lavatory,
but in all cases shall meet the requirements of local codes. Floors should be of rubber or vinyl-
plastic tile with a light but serviceable color with a nondirectional pattern that will hide scuff marks
and a dark cove base. Dark, patterned carpeting with rubber or vinyl cove base may be
considered. Plastered masonry walls, gypsum wallboard, or metal partitions should be painted with
interior enamel.
Ceilings should be suspended acoustical tile. The closets and storage rooms should be finished
the same as the offices. The toilet rooms should have ceramic tile floors, tile cove bases, and
glazed tile wainscot with painted plastered or concrete masonry walls above. The stalls in toilet
rooms should be metal with factory-applied enamel or other durable coating.
(2) A minimum width of 5 feet should be used for all office corridors and a minimum of 6 feet
for all corridors in work areas where corridors may be used for handling equipment. In planning
corridors and openings, consideration should always be given to the desirability (and in some
cases the necessity) of bringing bulky equipment into the plant and installing it intact. The corridors
on the office floor levels will normally be finished similarly to the offices. Floors of corridors on the
other levels should be trowel-finished concrete with hardener added. Where floors are likely to
remain wet a light brush finish after troweling should be specified to pre-vent slipping. Painted
concrete floors should be avoided because of the maintenance involved. Partitions should be
concrete or concrete masonry as desired. Unfinished concrete ceilings should be used and may be
painted or not as required to improve lighting.
(3) Stairways, aside from entrance steps or stairs, may be classed under three general types:
office stairs, work area stairs, and limited-use stairs or ladders. The office stairways should have
concrete or masonry walls, painted to match the finish in the adjacent areas; soffits or ceilings may
be painted or left unfinished. The finish as described above should extend to the floor levels below
and above the office floor. The office stairs should be of the pan type, steel- supported; with
concrete safety treads with safety nosings and metal risers. Painted metal, galvanized pipe or
extruded aluminum handrails may be used for these areas. Work area stairs should be similar to
office stairs or concrete with safety tread nosings, and the walls and ceilings should be unfinished
concrete. Limited-use stairs and ladders, which provide access to places requiring no regular
service, may be of concrete or steel of simple design and provided with adequate protection as
required by current safety codes.
164 | P a g e
Both male and female personnel of the plant should be provided with adjoining locker, shower, and
toilet rooms, located near the maintenance shop and erection bay. In large plants, additional toilet
rooms should be provided toward the far end of the plant. The locker rooms should have forced
ventilation and should contain benches and built-in type metal lockers. The shower rooms should
have gang-type showers for men with one shower head for each ten men to be accommodated per
day, and individual shower and drying stalls for women with one shower for each ten women to be
accommodated per day. In general, an increasing percentage of female workers should be planned
for. The toilet rooms adjoining the locker and shower room should have one water closet, one
lavatory and for men, one urinal for each ten personnel to be accommodated per day. The
additional toilet rooms shall be limited to one water closet, one lavatory and for men, one urinal. In
some cases, unisex toilet rooms may be used. A drinking fountain should be located in the corridor
adjacent to the area. Walls should be concrete, masonry or gypsum wall board on steel studs.
Shower and toilet room walls should have a standard height, glazed tile wainscot, except in the
showers, where it should extend to the height of the shower head. Ceilings and concrete portion of
the walls of the shower room subject to steam vapors should be given a prime coat of primer-
sealer (conforming to the latest edition of Federal Specification TT-P-56), one coat of enamel
undercoat (conforming to the latest edition of Federal Specification (TT-E-543) followed by one
coat of gloss enamel (conforming to the latest edition of Federal Specification TT-E-506). Concrete
masonry walls should receive one coat of concrete emulsion filler prior to the above treatment. A
janitor's closet should be provided and should have a service sink and shelves for supplies. The
walls of the janitor's closet shall be painted gypsum wall board or unpainted concrete or masonry.
The floor shall be trowel-finished concrete with no base.
(5) A lunch and break room should be provided. It should include adequate counter space and
storage cabinets and a range top with ventilation. It should provide space for a refrigerator,
microwave ovens, and vending machines. There should be adequate electrical outlets for coffee
pots, microwave ovens, vending machines, etc. It should have sufficient room to accommodate
anticipated plant personnel. Finishes should consist of rubber or vinyl plastic resilient flooring with
cove base, painted walls, and suspended acoustical tile ceiling. Insofar as practical, the lunch room
should be located so as to minimize the noise and vibration of the powerplant. The use of sound
absorbing wall panels covered with perforated vinyl should be considered. Sound dampers may
have to be used for the lunch room HVAC system. Unnecessary wall penetrations should be
avoided. If practical, consideration should be given to locating the lunch room at a level where
windows to the outside can provided. This is highly desirable considering the indoor nature of the
work.
(6) A first-aid room should be planned adjacent to the control room, if practicable, or otherwise
on either the office or locker floor level. This room should contain a first-aid cabinet, a cot,
and a lavatory and should have rubber or vinyl-plastic tile floor and cove base, painted
walls, and ceiling. The door should be wide enough to accommodate a stretcher.
(7) A powerhouse having more than three floor levels should be provided with one or more
elevators designed in conformance with the ANSI Safety Code for Elevators and
Dumbwaiters, Escalators and Moving Walks, A 17.1. The location should be established to
enable omission of a penthouse above the roof of the structure if possible and to reduce
165 | P a g e
corridor travel to a minimum. The elevator should be a passenger type having minimum
inside dimensions of five feet by seven feet, and a minimum capacity in conformance with
ANSI A 17.1. Car speed should not be less than 200 feet per minute and controls should
be of the pushbutton, automatic selective, collective type. Car and hoistway doors should
be of the horizontal sliding type equipped with automatic, two-speed power operators. In
large power-houses, a freight elevator may also be provided.
3-4. Interior Details
In order to obtain reasonable uniformity and to establish a high standard of quality, certain interior
details are described in the following paragraphs. However, these details are not mandatory. The
designer should use his knowledge of equipment and materials to achieve simplicity and first-cost
economy consistent with utility, safety, aesthetics, and low maintenance costs.
a. Floor and wall finishes. All floors should be designed for serviceability and appearance and
should adjoin all walls with a cove base if practical. These cove bases should be of concrete,
ceramic or quarry tile, or rubber or vinyl-plastic material. Where wet walls and floors may be
expected because of seepage, condensation, and similar conditions, gutters should be provided
around the room at the walls. Cove bases are not required where gutters are used. Floors in rooms
where oil or water is stored, processed, or handled should be adequately drained. A floor slope of
1/8-inch per foot is recommended where floor drains are installed. Curbs should not be provided at
doors in these rooms except as a last resort. The floors should be recessed below adjacent floor
whenever feasible. Steps should not be located at the immediate entrance. A platform or a ramp
with nonslip finish and maximum slope of 1 in 12 should be provided.
b. Acoustical tile ceiling. Where flat acoustical ceilings are required, acoustical tile of suitable
design may be supported on steel supports.
c. Door trim. All trim for doors throughout the plant should be of metal. It is recommended that
bucks be used for mounting all trim. Poured-in-place, integral jambs, and trim are not desired
except in areas where structural shapes are used as the finish trim.
d. Plumbing fixtures. Maintenance of the toilet rooms of the plant will be made easier if the floor
area is clear of fixture mountings. For this reason, wall-hung urinals, water-closets, and lavatories
should be used throughout the plant. Wall-hung, foot-operated flush valves should be furnished for
water closets and urinals. Unit coolers should be provided for drinking water, positioned in such
manner as not to unduly restrict passage through corridors. Because of possible damage due to
leaks and to facilitate access for repairs, plumbing fixtures, water supply, or drain piping should not
be located above the control room or directly over electrical switch-gear and similar equipment.
3-5. Schedule of Finishes
The finishes of some of the rooms in the plant are described above in detail. The finishes for all
rooms in a plant should be shown in the form of schedules to be included in the contract drawings.
The schedules should define the “finish” and “color” of the various components of each room, such
as floors, walls, ceilings, trim, doors, and equipment and should indicate the number and type of
166 | P a g e
prime and finish coats of paint required. Paint colors should be specified by the numbering system
of the paint color chips shown in Federal Standard No. 595, “Colors”.
3-6. Painting
The painting requirements for both the above and below water level portions of the powerhouse
are adequately covered, both as to the surface preparation and paint systems to be specified in
Guide Specification CW-09940, provisions of which should be followed in preparing the painting
portion of the Schedule of Finishes.
a. Special formulations. The special formulations listed in the above guide specification, or
Standard Federal Specifications should be used to procure the paint ingredients required in lieu of
reference to a specific manufacturer's product.
b. Aesthetic goals. Paint used to achieve aesthetic goals and super-graphics used to convey
information and directions are considered appropriate in areas open to the public.
c. Reasons for painting. With the few exceptions already listed, painting should not be used for
decorative purposes but should be confined to preventing corrosion of the surfaces requiring
protection, to improving lighting efficiency, and to stopping dusting of concrete. When painting is
required for concrete walls, the concrete in area visible to the public should have a sack- rubbed
finish before applying the paint.
d. Requirements. Painting requirements should be covered by general provisions in the

specifications and detailed information shown on the Schedule of Finishes. Some painting
requirements may need to be indicated on the details.
3-7. Design Memorandum
The architectural design of the powerhouse should be thoroughly discussed in a design

memorandum. General and specific consideration that influenced the exterior design and type of
construction should be given. The reasons for designing a windowless plant or for using windows
and also the reasons for using various materials such as precast concrete panels, concrete poured
mono-lithically, prefabricated aluminum or stainless-steel wall panels for the exterior finishes of the
powerhouse should be stated. The method of determining the amount of space allotted for public
use and for offices should be explained.
3-8. Drawings
The architectural drawings required for the construction of the powerplant should include the layout
of grounds and access roads, exterior and interior elevations of the powerhouse, cross sections
through the powerhouse showing all types of construction and floor elevations, detail elevations of
all tile work and special interior treatments, detail sections of stairs, stair and handrail details,
window and door schedules and details, plans of all floors and roofs, detail plans of special areas
such as public reception room, details of special decorative items, details of dado and tile finishes,
details of roofing and flashings, and any other architectural details that will be needed for the
167 | P a g e
construction of the powerhouse. A rectangular system of column reference lines should be

established and, in general, all dimensions should be tied to these reference lines.
a. General layout. The general layout should be drawn at such a scale as to require only one
sheet and should show means of access to the plant, public and employee parking facilities,
grading, drainage, lighting, and landscaping. Details of architectural features of the layout, such as
floodlighting arrangements and land-scaping, should be shown at a larger scale on other drawings.
b. Elevations. The exterior elevations of the power-house should be made at a scale that will
allow the full length of the powerhouse to be shown on a standard size sheet. These elevations
should show all roof and floor elevations, finish grade elevations, all windows, doors, or other
openings, V-rustications, surface treatments and special decorations and should make reference to
the proper drawings for details. Interior elevations of power-house walls may usually be shown
adequately on the cross sections. All tile wainscots should be drawn in elevation at not less than a
1/4-inch scale and should show the vertical and horizontal courses of tile and should give
dimensions of the tile and of wall openings. All wainscots, floors, and door openings should be laid
out, using the 4-inch modular system as proposed by the American Standards Association.
c. Plans. Construction drawings required for the construction of the powerplant shall be in
accordance with specific requirements of Paragraph 7c of CE-4000, “Lump-sum Contract for
Engineer Services for Design of Hydroelectric Power Plant.”
Chapter 4
Structural Requirements
4-1. Design Stresses
Allowable stresses will depend on the materials involved, the conditions of loading, and severity of
exposure.
a. Allowable stresses. Structural steel and welded joints should be designed in accordance with
the allow-able stresses outlined in the latest version of the AISC construction manual. Welding
details should be as out-lined by the latest version of AWS D1.1 ªStructural Welding Code-Steel.º
Gates, Bulkheads, Trashracks, and associated guides should be designed using the allowable
stresses outlined in EM 1110-1-2102. Steel and aluminum/switchyard structure should be as
designed with the loading and allowable stresses contained in NEMA publication SG-6 “Power
Switching Equipment,” part 36.
b. Concrete structures. Concrete structures loaded hydraulically should be designed in

accordance with the procedures outlined in EM 1110-2-2104 ªStrength Design for Reinforced
Concrete Hydraulic Structures.º Those portions of a powerhouse that will not have water loading,
such as the superstructure, may be designed in accordance with the latest version of ACI 318
“Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.”
168 | P a g e
4-2. Design Loads
a. General considerations. The structures should be designed to sustain the maximum dead,
live, hydrostatic, wind, or earthquake loads which may be imposed upon them. Where only partial
installation is to be made under the initial construction program, consideration should be given to
the temporary loading conditions as well as those anticipated for the completed structures. The
stability of all powerhouse monoliths should be investigated for all stages of construction; and loads
that may be imposed or absent during the construction period should be accounted for in the
design memoranda.
b. Dead loads. Dead loads to be considered in the design consist of the weight of the structure
itself, including the walls, floors, partitions, roofs, and all other permanent construction and fixed
equipment. The approximate unit weights of materials commonly used in construction can be found
in the AISC Manual. For those materials not included, refer to ASCE (1990). A check should be
made of the actual weights where a variation might affect the adequacy of the design, or in cases
where the construction may vary from normal practice.
c. Live loads. In general, floors are designed for an assumed uniform load per square foot of
floor area. However, the floors should be investigated for the effects of any concentrated load,
minus the uniform load, over the area occupied. Equipment loads should take into account
installation, erection, and maintenance conditions as well as impact and vibration after installation.
In most cases, it will be necessary to proceed with the design on the basis of estimated loads and
loaded areas until such time as the actual data are available from the manufacturers. All live loads
used in design should be recorded with notations as to whether the loads are actual or assumed.
The weights of turbines and generators of Corps of Engineers hydroelectric power projects are
tabulated in Appendix B1. However, weights will vary considerably for units of the same capacity.
Estimates of the weights of the machines should always be requested from the manufacturers for
preliminary use in the design. Assumed loads should be checked later against actual loads, and,
where differences are appreciable, the necessary modifications in the design should be made.
(1) The live loads shown in Table 4-1 are recommended for the design of slabs, beams,
girders, and columns in the area indicated. These loads may be modified, if necessary, to suit the
conditions on individual projects, but will ordinarily be considered minimum design loads. These
loads may be reduced 20 percent for the design of a girder, truss, column, or footing supporting
more than 300 square feet of slab, except that for generator room and erection floors this reduction
will be allowed only where the member under consideration supports more than 500 square feet of
slab. This differs from ASCE (1990) recommendations for live load reduction because of the
loadings historically required in powerhouse floor slabs.
Draft tube decks, gantry decks, and erection bays are often made accessible to trucks and Mobile
Cranes, the wheel loads of which may produce stresses greater than those caused by the uniform
live load. Under these conditions, the loading used for design should include the weight of the
heaviest piece of equipment, such as a complete transformer including oil plus the weight of the
truck or crane. Stresses should be computed in accordance with AASHTO “Standard
Specifications of Highway Bridges.”
As a safety measure it would be advisable to post the load limit in all cases where such a load is
used in design. Where mobile cranes are in use, the design should include outrigger loads. Where
169 | P a g e
the powerhouse monoliths include the head gate structure and intake deck, moving concentrated
loads such as mobile cranes and trucks handling equipment parts and trans-formers should be
considered in the design of the deck and supporting structure. In case the deck carries a high-way,
it should be designed for standard highway loading also.
(3) Impact factors for vehicle wheel loads are given in AASHTO “Standard Specifications for
Highway Bridges.” Impact factors for crane wheel loads on run-ways are given in paragraph 4c(9).
(4) Wind loading should be applied to the structure as outlined in ASCE (1990). Members
subject to stresses produced by a combination of wind and other loads listed under group II in EM
1110-2-2105 should be proportioned on the basis of increased allowable stresses. For concrete
structures, ACI 318 and EM 1110-2-2104 provide appropriate load factors to be used for wind
loading. The design of switchyard and take-off structures for wind is covered in the reference cited
in para-graphs 4-2d and 4-15.
Table 4-1
Minimum Uniformly Distributed Live Loads
Element lb/sq ft
Roofs 50
Stairways 100
Floors:
Offices 100
Corridors 100
Reception rooms 100
Toilets and locker rooms 100
Equipment and storage rooms 200
Control room 200
Spreading room 150
Generator room *500
Turbine room 1,000
Erection floor 1,000
Maintenance shop 300
Pump rooms and oil purification rooms 200
Gantry deck (outdoor powerhouse) 300 or H 20
Transformer deck 300
Intake deck--general 300 or H 20
Intake deck--heavy lift areas 1,000
Powerhouse access 300 or H 20
Draft tube deck 300 or H 20
*300/lb/sq ft should be used for mezzanine floors and 1,000 lb/sq ft for areas which may be used for storage or erection of generator or turbine
parts
(5) Construction loads should be carefully considered to determine if provision should be

made in the design of these temporary loads or whether false work or temporary bracing will
suffice. It will be noted that construction loads are classified as Group II loading in EM 1110-2-
2105, and should have the applicable load factor combinations for concrete structures.
(6) The possibility of seismic activity should be considered and appropriate forces included in
the design. The structural analysis for seismic loading consists of two parts: The traditional
overturning and sliding stability analysis using an appropriate seismic coefficient, and a dynamic
internal stress analysis, using either site dependent earthquake ground motions or a static seismic
coefficient. The use of the seismic coefficient should be limited to sites where the peak ground
170 | P a g e
acceleration for the maximum credible earthquake is less than 0.2 g. Where a dynamic analysis is
involved the powerhouse should be investigated for both the maximum credible earthquake and
the operating basic earthquake. Earth-quake motions should be picked by procedures outlined in
ETL 1110-2-301 “Interim Procedures for Specifying Earthquake Motions.” General guidance for
seismic design and analysis is found in ER 1110-2-1806 “Earth-quake Design and Analysis for
Corps of Engineers Projects.” Specific criteria for powerhouses should be as outlined in ETL 1110-
2-303 ªEarthquake Analysis and Design of Concrete Gravity Dams.º This reference should be
followed closely when the powerhouse intake forms a part of the dam. Site-dependent earthquake
time histories or response spectra should be carefully chosen through geological and seismological
investigation of the powerhouse site.
All loads resulting from headwater and from tailwater should be accounted for. Since it is
sometimes impracticable to protect the powerhouse against flooding at maximum tailwater
elevation, a level should be selected above which flooding and equalization of interior and exterior
water loads will occur. This elevation should be determined after careful consideration of all factors
involved, particularly the cost of initial construction and of rehabilitation in relation to flood levels
and frequencies. The structures should be designed to with-stand tailwater pressures up to the
chosen level and positive provisions should be incorporated in the structure to permit rapid flooding
and equalization of pressures after the tailwater rises above this level. Provisions should also be
made for rapid draining of the powerhouse when the tailwater drops. A maximum tailwater
elevation (below that selected for flooding the entire powerhouse) should also be chosen for
unwatered draft tubes and provisions for automatic flooding of the water passages when that level
is exceeded should be considered. It is nearly always advisable to reduce the uplift pressures on
the draft-tube floor by means of a drainage system. When ªfloatingº or relatively flexible floor slabs
are used, they are not considered in the stability analysis, either as contributing weight or resisting
uplift. When the floor slabs must take part of the foundation load, as is sometimes the case when
the foundation is soil or poor rock, uplift should be assumed and the slab made an integral part of
the draft-tube structure.
(8) Snow loading should be applied to the structure as outlined in ASCE (1990) “Minimum
Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures.” Members subject to stresses produced by snow
loading should be proportioned by treating it as a Group 1 loading in EM 1110-2-2105 or, in the
case of concrete structures, as a basic live loading.
(9) Wheel loads should be treated as moving live loads in the design of crane runways.
Maximum wheel loads should be computed from the dead load of the crane and trolleys plus the
rated live load capacity, with the load in position to produce maximum truck reaction at the side of
the runway under consideration. Dimensional data, weights, and truck reactions for cranes installed
in Corps of Engineers powerhouses are given in EM 1110-2-4203. An impact allowance of 10
percent for cranes over 80-ton capacity, and from 12 percent to 18 percent for smaller cranes,
should be added to the static loads. Side thrust at the top of the rail should be taken as 10 percent
of the summation of the trolley weight and rated capacity, with three-fourths of this amount
distributed equally among the wheels at either side of the runway. This may vary in the case of
unequal stiffness of the walls supporting the runway. For instance, if one wall is relatively massive,
the entire side thrust may be taken by this wall with little or no thrust taken by the more slender
wall. The runway design should provide for longitudinal forces at the top of rail equal to 10 percent
171 | P a g e
of the maximum vertical wheel loads. Crane stops should be designed to safely withstand the
impact of the crane traveling at full speed with power off. Only the dead weight of the crane will be
considered and the resulting longitudinal forces should be provided for in the design of the crane
runway.
d. Load on switchyard structures. Switchyard structures should be designed for line pull,
equipment load, dead load, wind load, snow load, and ice load in accordance with the
requirements of the NEMA Publication SG-6-Power Switching Equipment. Take off tower line
loading should conform to ANSI Standard C2, National Electrical Safety Code, Section 25, and
shall include applicable combinations of dead load, and line tension due to wind, ice and
temperature changes.
4-3. Stability Analysis
a. Outline of investigation. A stability analysis should be made for each monolith of the
powerhouse and all critical levels should be investigated for the most severe combination of
horizontal and vertical forces. In the case of a monolith in which the power unit will not be installed
with the initial construction, the stability should be investigated for the interim as well as the final
condition. Analysis should be made for the applicable cases indicated below and for any other
combinations of conditions which might prove critical. Cases S-1, S-2, S-3, and S-4, below are
applicable when the powerhouse is separated from the dam, and Cases M-1, M-2, M-3, and M-4
are applicable when the powerhouse and head-works form a part of the dam.
(1) Applicable when powerhouse is separated from dam.
(a) Case S-1: head gates open--headwater at top of flood-control pool, hydraulic thrusts,
minimum tailwater, spiral case full, draft tube full, uplift, and wind or earthquake.
(b) Case S-2: head gates open, tailwater at power-house flooding level, spiral case full, draft
tube full, uplift, and wind or earthquake.
(c) Case S-3: head gates closed, tailwater at draft-tube flooding level, spiral case empty, draft
tube empty, uplift, and wind or earthquake.
(d) Case S-4 (Construction): no tailwater, and no uplift.
(2) Applicable when powerhouse and headworks, form part of dam. Case M-1: head gates
closed, headwater at top of flood-control pool, minimum tailwater (ice pressure (if applicable)), draft
tube and spiral case open to tailwater (uplift), and wind on upstream side or earthquake.
(b) Case M-2: head gates open, headwater at maxi-mum flood level, tailwater at powerhouse
flooding level, spiral case full, draft tube full (uplift), and wind on upstream side or earthquake.
(c) Case M-3: head gates closed, headwater at top of flood-control pool, tailwater at draft-tube
flooding level, spiral case empty, draft tube empty, uplift, and wind on upstream side or earthquake.
172 | P a g e
(d) Case M-4 (Construction): no headwater, no tailwater, no uplift, and wind or earthquake.
(3) In some cases, the maximum overturning moment will occur when tailwater is at some
intermediate level between minimum and maximum.
(4) In analyzing monoliths containing draft tubes, the floor of the draft tube should not usually
be considered as part of the active base area since it is generally designed to take neither uplift nor
foundation pressure. (See paragraph 4-2c(7)).
(5) Monoliths should also be checked for lateral stability under applicable conditions, and the
possibility of flotation at high tailwater levels should be borne in mind.
b. Vertical forces. The vertical forces that should be considered in the stability analysis are the
dead weight of the structure, fixed equipment weights, supported weights of earth and water, and
uplift. The weights of movable equipment such as cranes and heavily loaded trucks should be
included only where such loads will decrease the factor of safety against overturning.
c. Horizontal forces. The horizontal forces that should be considered are those due to
headwater, tail-water, ice, earth, and wind or earthquake pressures. Force due to waves should
also be included if the fetch is great enough to cause waves of considerable height. The forces
resulting from temperature changes in steel penstocks need not be considered, but the pressure of
water in the penstocks should be included as hydraulic thrust resulting from wicket gate closure,
depending upon the assumed conditions. The application and intensity of wind pressure or
earthquake should be as prescribed in paragraphs 4-2c(4) and 4-2c(6).
d. Uplift assumptions. Effective downstream drain-age whether natural or artificial will in

general, limit the uplift at the toe of the structure to tailwater. If the powerhouse is separate from the
dam, uplift from tail-water should be assumed 100 percent effective on the entire foundation area.
If the powerhouse forms part of the dam, uplift assumptions should be the same as those for the
dam, as described in EM 1110-2-2200. For those structures founded on soil, uplift should be
assumed to vary from headwater to tailwater using the line of seep-age method as outlined in EM
1110-2-2502, “Retaining and Floodwalls.” For a majority of structures, this method is sufficiently
accurate, however there may be special situations where the flow net method is required to
evaluate uplift.
e. Base pressures and stability. Ordinarily the maxi-mum base pressures do not govern the
design of powerhouse on sound rock. However, regardless of the foundation material, they should
always be checked to make sure they do not exceed the safe working values established as a
result of the geological or soils investigations. For conditions that include earthquake, the resultant
of all forces may fall outside the kern but within the base a sufficient distance so that the allowable
foundation pressure is not exceeded. The location of the resultant of all forces, including uplift,
acting on the structure should fall within the kern of either a rectangular or irregularly shaped base.
In pile foundations, the allowable material, bearing, and tension valves for the piles should not be
exceeded. If the foundation at the selected site is entirely soil, or is a combination of soil and rock,
special consideration should be given to the possibility of unequal settlement. It may be necessary
to investigate the shearing strength of the foundation or, in case of a hillside location, to investigate
173 | P a g e
the stability of the structure and foundation together by means of one of the methods discussed in
EM 1110-2-1902.
f. Sliding factor. EM 1110-2-2200 contains the criteria and guidance for assessing the sliding
stability for dams and related hydraulic structures. Required factor of safety for major concrete
structures are 2.0 for normal static loadings and 1.3 for seismic loading conditions. Horizontal
earthquake acceleration can be obtained from seismic zone maps and the seismic coefficient
method is the most expedient method to use when calculating sliding stability.
4-4. Subgrade Conditions and Treatments
a. Rock foundation. It is very important that the structure rest on sound material, unweathered
and unshattered by blasting, in order to develop full resistance to shearing and sliding. The
character of some rock foundations is such that disintegration will take place upon short exposure.
In these circumstances it will be necessary to preserve, insofar as possible, the natural
characteristics of the unexposed foundation material. Disintegration may be prevented either by
delaying the excavation of the last foot or two of material until just prior to placing concrete, or by
excavating to final grade and immediately applying asphalt or a similar waterproof coating to the
exposed surface. Another method is to place a light concrete cover immediately upon exposure,
which provides a better surface for workmen and equipment as well as protection for the
foundation. An otherwise sound rock foundation may contain seams of clay or other unsuitable
materials which must be excavated and filled with concrete, or areas for broken rock which must be
consolidated by pressure grouting.
b. Soil foundation. The design of powerhouse foundation on earth is based on the in-site shear
and bearing strength of the underlying soil, with consideration being taken of weak seams at
deeper depths below the foundation line. Weak materials may require excavation to firmer material
or the use of piles as a foundation. A close cooperation between the designer and the foundation
and materials engineer must exist even in preliminary design. Factors of safety against sliding
should be computed using procedures discussed in paragraph 4-3f.
4-5. Foundation Drainage and Grouting
Rock foundation. Provisions should be made for foundation drainage, particularly under the draft-
tube floor slabs, to reduce uplift and permit the unwatering of draft tubes. Usually, a network of
drains under the draft tubes is all that is required. Holes drilled into the rock connect with these
drains, which discharge through weep holes in the slab into the draft tubes. Drain holes should be
cleared on a routine basis, perhaps every 5 years, to ensure their functional capability. For
unwatering, a drain in each draft tube leads, through a valved connecting pipe, to a header which
drains to a sump from which the water is pumped outside the powerhouse. Theoretically, the drill
holes in the rock should be deep enough so the hydrostatic uplift (due to maximum tailwater with
draft tube unwatered) on a horizontal plane at the bottom of the holes will be more than balanced
by the weight of the rock above the plane plus the weight of the draft tube floor slab. A lesser depth
will usually be satisfactory, as the rock may be assumed to “arch” to some extent across the end
piers of the draft tube. It is recommended that the drain holes extend to a depth at least equal to
174 | P a g e
one-half the monolith width below the floor slab. Drain holes should be spaced about 12 feet to 15
feet on centers with weep holes in the slab 6 feet to 7-1/2 feet on centers. Where the nature of the
rock indicates percolation of such magnitude as to render the unwatering of draft tubes difficult,
perimeter grouting, area grouting, or both may be used within the powerhouse foundation area.
Care should be taken that this grouting does not interfere with drainage essential to the dam or the
powerhouse. If perimeter grouting is used, a system of relief drains near the upstream side of the
monoliths is necessary to pre-vent possible building up of headwater pressure under the structure
in case of leakage through or under the upstream grout curtain. Because of the possibility that
headwater may enter the area and cause worse unwatering and uplift conditions than would have
been the case without curtains, it is desirable to avoid perimeter grouting if possible. For additional
information on the purpose, theory, and methods of foundation grouting refer to EM 1110-2-3506.
b. Soil foundations. When powerhouse structures rest on soil, it is necessary to protect the
foundation material against scour and piping. The potential for effective drainage and grouting in
soil materials is very sensitive to the exact nature of the material. Uplift reduction may be more
effective if underlying drainage blankets are used rather than drain holes.
4-6. Substructure Functions and Components
The powerhouse substructure supports the turbines and generators as well as a superstructure for
their protection and equipment related to their operation. The substructure also contains the water
passages, includes rooms and galleries needed for certain mechanical and electrical equipment
and services, and furnishes most of the mass needed for stability. It is usually desirable, where the
turbines have steel spiral cases, to provide recesses in the substructure for accommodation of
these parts and to design the structure so that concreting operations can continue without
interruption during their installation. Access galleries to the draft tube and spiral case should also
be provided in the substructure. Except as provided in Table 4-2, substructure concrete should be
placed in lifts, generally not more than 5 feet thick. Each lift should be divided into pours by vertical
joints as deter-mined by equipment installation needs and as required to minimize shrinkage and
temperature cracking.
175 | P a g e
4-7. Joints
a. General. The purpose of joints is to facilitate construction, to prevent destructive or unsightly

cracks, and to reduce or eliminate the transmission of stresses from one portion of a structure to
another.
b. Types of joints. Joints may be classified as expansion, contraction, construction, or control.

Selection of the location and type of joint is governed by both architectural and structural
requirements. Reinforcing steel or structural steel should not cross expansion or contraction joints
but may be continued across construction and control joints. The functions of the various joints are
as follows:
Contraction joints are used to divide the structure into separate monoliths, the principal purpose
being to reduce the tendency to crack due to shrinkage resulting from the cooling of the concrete
from the maximum temperature. The location and spacing of the transverse contraction joints will
be determined by the space required for the unit. Where the powerhouse structure is located
immediately downstream or adjacent to the concrete gravity dam, a contraction joint will be
provided to separate the dam and powerhouse. In the above case where more than one generating
unit is involved, the spacing of the transverse contraction joints of the intake monoliths must be the
same as in the powerhouse sub-structure, although not necessarily on the same alignment. Other
detailed criteria for contraction joints as well as the necessary construction joints are given in EM
1110-2-2000. Ordinarily, no initial opening or treatment of the vertical concrete surfaces at the joint
is necessary. However, the longitudinal formed joint between the toe of the dam and the
powerhouse (see paragraph 6) should have an initial opening of about 1 inch filled with a suitable
pre-molded compressive-type filler to permit possible movement of the dam without transfer of load
to the powerhouse substructure. Contraction joints in the substructure should continue through the
superstructure. Offsets in contraction joints are undesirable and should be avoided if possible.
(2) Construction joints are required primarily for the practical purpose of dividing the structure
into satisfactory and convenient working units during concrete placement. Also, in large or irregular
pours, it is usually desirable to require construction joints in order to minimize the influence of
shrinkage on the formation of cracks. Construction joints should be so located and designed that
they will not affect the continuity of the structure. Reinforcing steel should be continued across the
joint and provisions made to transmit any shear from one side to the other. Horizontal construction
joints normally do not require keying, because the roughened surface resulting from water jetting,
green cutting, or sand blasting is adequate for transferring shear. This type of joint preparation is
not feasible for vertical construction joints where shear keys are usually necessary.
(3) Control joints are adequately described and detailed in EM 1110-2-2000 and in Guide
Spec. CW-03301.
c. Criteria for location of construction joints. Construction joints should be located to minimize
cracking in the more massive concrete placements. Greater restrictions are necessary where
concrete is to be watertight, such as in draft tubes and spiral cases; cracking is caused by heat
generated during curing of the concrete and external and internal restraint to attendant volume
changes. This type of cracking is minimized by reducing lift heights, using low slump mixes,
176 | P a g e
replacing cement with pozzolan, increasing cure time between lifts, insulating to control the rate of
cooling, and reducing the placing temperature of the concrete. Concrete placed under these
conditions is termed “temperature-controlled concrete.”
(1) For less massive concrete placements, construction joints should be located to facilitate
forming and placing of concrete. Lift height is controlled by form, shoring, and bracing design
requirements to resist the concrete pressure and dead weight. Reduced lift heights are often
necessary when concrete placement is made difficult because of heavy, closely spaced reinforcing,
or other physical constraints to placing and compaction equipment.
(2) Basic lift heights (in feet) should not exceed the limitations shown in Table 4-2.
(3) Powerhouse substructures often use a two-stage concreting operation where the
downstream wall and tailrace structure, and some or all of the spiral case piers are placed in the
first stage concrete forming a skeleton structure. The embedded turbine parts, and the sloping floor
and roof of unlined concrete spiral cases are cast in the second stage concrete. This arrangement
allows early “water-up” of the project, and also allows each unit to be placed ªon-lineº upon its
completion while construction continues in neighboring bays. Keys should be formed in the vertical
construction joints of the first stage concrete, and reinforcing dowels provided so the completed
structure acts monolithically. Where the vertical joints are subjected to headwater or tailwater
pressure, reinforcing should also be adequate to resist the hydrostatic loading created in the joint.
When embedding steel lined spiral cases, the lift heights below the center line of the distributor lift
heights are limited to 5 feet.
(4) To prevent distortion of the turbine liner concrete should be placed in layers such that there
is no more than a one-foot height differential of fresh concrete against the liner. The liner is to be
continuously sprayed with water during cure of the concrete.
(5) Where main structural slabs frame into walls, it is preferable to locate a horizontal
construction joint in the wall at the elevation of the bottom of the slab. The slab is then cast over
the prepared wall joint. Keying of main slabs into walls or piers pose design and construction
problems and should be used only when the construction schedule dictates a need for delaying the
slab placement. When main slabs are keyed, it is necessary to dowel heavy reinforcing through the
forms and then lap splice closely spaced slab reinforcing at a point of maximum stress. Deep key
ways interfere with the vertical curtain of wall reinforcing particularly if it is necessary to waterstop
the keyed joint. These problems are less evident in thin, lightly loaded slabs, and it is often more
economical to key these slabs into the walls.
(6) Exterior concrete decks covering interior areas required to be dry should have a minimum
thickness of 12 inches. Minimum reinforcement should be 0.75% of the cross-sectional area with
half distributed to each face. Waterstops should be provided at contraction joints, and construction
joints should be treated as specified in guide specifications CW 03301.
(7) Vertical construction joints should be used to divide lift placements covering large areas
into two or more smaller placements based on the following:
177 | P a g e
(a) Maximum rate concrete can be batched and placed without developing cold joints.
(b) Watertight concrete or other serviceability requirements affected by shrinkage cracking.
(c) Openings, blockouts or other discontinuities in the placement that tend to generate cracks.
(d) A need for a vertical construction joint, such as the one normally used between the intake
and power-house structures, to allow flexibility in concrete placing schedules for different
construction areas.
(e) The temperature-controlled concrete requirements.
As a general guide, base slabs up to 100 feet wide, can be placed, without need for intermediate
vertical joints, using a 3-inch aggregate, temperature-controlled concrete, and a batching and
placing capability of 150 cubic yards per hour. Because of the tendency for shrinkage cracks to
radiate out from the turbine pit blockout, the greatest dimension for a spiral case roof pour should
be limited to 70 feet, using 3-inch aggregate temperature-controlled concrete. By using additional
reinforcing to minimize crack widths for satisfying the watertight concrete requirements, pour widths
can be increased. With the added reinforcing, and by carefully establishing the temperature control
requirements, it is seldom necessary to resort to segmented, waterstopped roof placements used
in the past for unlimited concrete spiral cases.
(9) When vertical construction joints are required in the substructure, they should extend
upward through the massive part of the structure, but need not extend into less massive piers,
slabs or walls. Vertical construction joints should be keyed, and adequate shear friction rein-forcing
should be provided across the joint to develop the required shear capacity.
(10) A sloping construction joint should be located at the top of the main intermediate piers in
the intake and draft tube. The roof of the water passage is then placed across the top of the
prepared surface of the piers. Due to the slope of the roof, several horizontally placed lifts are
usually required to complete the roof. Where the lift tends to feather out to the roof form, the pour
line should be dubbed down 12 inches to eliminate the feathered edge.
(11) Consideration should be given to the location of horizontal construction joints on

exposed faces. A V-notch rustication can be chamfering the joints in keeping with the architectural
treatment.
4-8. Waterstops
Waterstops across contraction joints are necessary to prevent leakage and obtain satisfactory dry
operating and working conditions. They are required to exclude water under head in the
substructure and to ensure weather-tightness of the joints in the superstructure. Material of rubber
or polyvinylchloride (PVC) is suitable for this purpose. Extensive experience in the use of molded
rubber or extruded polyvinylchloride waterstops in joints of conduits and hydraulic structures have
proved the practicability and advantages of using either of these materials. Copper waterstops
178 | P a g e
were used in the past, however, they will fail where yielding foundations or other conditions result
in differential movement between monoliths. They are also easily damaged during installation. PVC
or rubber waterstops with a center bulb can withstand this type of movement and are
recommended for use in hydroelectric products. A wider width is indicated for waterstops in the
substructure where large aggregate is used and higher water pressures exist than for waterstops to
be installed in low-pressure areas or for weather-tightness only. Waterstops should be placed as
near to the surface as practicable without forming weak corners in the concrete that may spall as a
result of weathering, or impact, and should create a continuous barrier about the protected area. All
laps or joints in rubber waterstops should be vulcanized or satisfactorily cemented together, and
joints in “PVC” waterstops should be adequately heat sealed. Waterstops in contact with
headwater for structures founded on rock should terminate in a recess formed by drilling holes 6
inches deep into the rocks and should be carefully grouted in place. Occasionally, double
waterstops are required in pier joints, one on either side of a formed hole, containing bituminous
material. In some important locations, two waterstops and a drain should be used to ensure water-
tightness.
4-9. Draft Tubes
The outline of the draft tube is usually determined by the turbine manufacturer to suit the turbine
operating requirements. However, in most cases, the manufacturer will be limited by certain
physical requirements, such as the spacing and setting of the units, depth of foundations, and
elevation of tailrace. The draft-tube portion of the substructure should be designed to withstand all
loads that may be imposed on it, including superstructure loads, foundation reactions on the piers,
tailwater on the roof, and the bursting effect of tailwater inside the draft-tube. Uplift under the floor
of the draft-tube should also be considered in the design of the slab even when relief drains are
provided. The upstream ends of intermediate piers should have heavy cast or structural steel
nosing (usually furnished by the turbine manufacturer) to with-stand the concentrated vertical load
and to protect the piers from erosion. Piers between adjacent draft-tubes are usually bisected by
the monolith contraction joint from which water is excluded by seals near the gate slot. Therefore,
each half pier must be designed for the pressure of tailwater on the inside of the draft tube as a
nor-mal condition. It is advisable to consider also the possibility of unbalanced load in the opposite
direction in case of failure of a contraction joint seal with the draft-tube unwatered.
4-10. Spiral Cases
a. General. Spiral cases should be designed to withstand the bursting pressure of maximum
headwater plus water hammer.
b. Types of spiral cases. The type of spiral case depends on the power plant being considered.
(1) For low-head plants they may be of unlined concrete with engineered reinforcement to
withstand applied dead, hydraulic and equipment loads.
(2) For medium and high head plants, they should be made of steel plate with shop welded
longitudinal joints. Circumferential joints may be either field welded or high strength bolted,
depending on the turbine manufacturers design. Welded joints should be double-vee butt joints
179 | P a g e
made under strict quality control and in accordance with the provisions of ASME. It is preferred that
the “c” sections of spiral cases requiring field welding be butt-welded to skirt plates which should be
shop-welded to the stay rings. All longitudinal welds should be radio-graphed. Ordinarily, stress
relieving will not be required. When considering spiral cases under high head, and when shipping,
handling, and erection cost would control, consideration should be given to the use of high strength
steels. Completed spiral cases should be proof tested hydrostatically with a test pressure equal to
1-1/2 times the maximum design pressure.
c. Construction details.
(1) Consideration should be given to under-drainage of the turbine floor to intercept seepage
upward through the spiral case roof. Under-drainage should consist of a grid of shallow trenches in
the concrete subfloor covered by porous concrete planks and overlaid by a 3-inch gravel bed. The
vertical joint between the intake structure and the spiral case roof should contain a double
waterstop and drain. Where the spiral case piers are placed in the first of a two-stage concreting
operation described in paragraph 4-7c, and extend above the spiral case roof line, the joint
between the piers and roof should be double waterstopped. Consideration should also be given to
providing a grouted contact strip in the contraction joint between adjacent spiral case piers at
approximately mid-height of the pier. When a unit is unwatered, unbalanced hydrostatic load will be
shared by both piers. The contact strip is constructed by injecting grout into a formed recess about
3 inches wide and 12 inches high located in the contraction joint. A waterstop should be located
just above and below the recess to prevent grouting the entire joint.
The substructure may be “skeletonized” and the downstream wall and portions of the side walls or
piers completed prior to embedment of the spiral case. In this case a minimum clearance of 2 to 3
feet must be left between the spiral case liner and the concrete walls of the recess. The transition
section from penstock to spiral case extension should not be encased. A penstock room or gallery
should be provided to house the transition, penstock coupling, and when required, a butterfly or
spherical closure valve. A Dresser-type coupling should be used to connect the penstock to the
spiral case. The lifts of concrete around the spiral case liner should be limited to the depth
specified in paragraph 4-7c. A mini-mum of 72 hours per lift shall elapse between the placing of
each successive lift. Bent steel 'J'-pipes 6 inches or more in diameter should be provided for
placing concrete under the stay ring, discharge ring, and spiral case. The number of 'J' pipes
required depends on the size of the spiral case. Concrete may be pumped through the 'J' pipes
using a positive displacement concrete pump. After concrete placement is complete the 'J' pipes
should be filled with concrete and left in place.
d. Embedment conditions. Two methods of embedment of steel spiral cases in concrete are
commonly used:
(1) When steel spiral cases are to be embedded in concrete in an unwatered condition, the top
portion of the spiral case should be covered with a compressible mem-brane to ensure that the
spiral case liner resists internal pressure by ring tension with only a small load being transmitted
into the surrounding concrete. The compressible membrane should consist of sheets of closed cell
foam material with the property that a 1/4-inch-thick piece deflects 0.10 inch under a 50-psi uniform
180 | P a g e
pressure applied normal to the surface. Polyvinylchloride foam and polyurethane foam are
acceptable, and the sheets of this material should be attached to the spiral case liner with an
adhesive. The thickness of the membrane depends on the diameter and thickness of the spiral
case liner, and the internal pressure being resisted. The compressible membrane should extend to
the first construction joint below the horizontal centerline of the spiral case. A drain should be
provided along the lower limits of the compressible membrane in order to prevent trans-mitting
stress to the concrete through a water medium.
When steel spiral cases are to be embedded in concrete under a pressurized condition, a test
barrel is used to close off the opening between the upper and lower stay rings, and a test head is
attached at the inlet of the spiral case extension. The spiral case is filled with water and
pressurized to the test pressure or to a pressure equal to head water plus water hammer while
encasement concrete is placed. Grout and vent holes in the stay ring are fitted with plugs which
remain in place until the spiral case is unwatered. After concrete has been placed at least one lift
above the top of the spiral case, and the top lift has set at least 72 hours, the spiral case should be
unwatered and the test barrel and test head removed. Workable concrete should then be placed
through the bent steel 'J' pipes to fill the void under the stay ring/discharge ring. Neither a
compressible membrane or drains are required for embedding spiral cases under the pressurized
condition, except when low alloy steels or high strength quenched and tempered alloy steels are
used for spiral case construction, consideration should be given to providing drains.
e. Concrete placing. The use of mechanical vibrators will not be permitted closer than 5 feet to
any part of the spiral case, stay ring/discharge ring, or draft tube liner, except that small vibrators
may be lowered through the grout holes in the stay ring to vibrate concrete placed through the steel
'J' pipes.
(1) Concrete placement through the steel 'J' pipes should be accomplished in a single lift
operation which brings the concrete to within about 1 inch of the lower stay ring. After a minimum
seven-day cure period, grout fill pipes shall be attached to grout holes spaced evenly around the
stay ring, and non-shrink grout injected at a head not exceeding 6 feet. A vent hole shall be located
approximately midway between grout holes to permit escape of entrapped air and water.
(2) Concrete reinforcement above the spiral case should be designed to distribute the
generator pedestal and turbine floor loads to the stay ring and the spiral case piers and walls.
4-11. Generator Pedestals
The generator, except in some low-head plants, is usually supported on a heavy concrete pedestal.
The details of this pedestal will depend on the make and type of generator to be installed. It should
be of massive construction and should be designed to resist vibrational forces from the moving
mechanical parts, the heavy loads from the thrust bearing, and the short circuit torque of the
genera-tor. It is usually designed to support the generator room floor also. Openings in the
pedestal should be provided on all four sides when practicable for access to and ventilation of the
turbine pit. Adequate head room should be provided between the underside of the generator and
the generator platform, if one is used, and between this plat-form and the turbine walkway.
181 | P a g e
4-12. Bulb Turbine Supports
Bulb turbines are supported in a much different manner than the typical vertical shaft Francis or
Kaplan unit. A typical cross section of a bulb unit is shown in Figure 4-1. The main element of
support for a bulb turbine is the stay column. It must carry the weight of the rotating parts, most of
the stationary parts, and the hydraulic loads due to thrust, hydrostatic pressure, and transient
loading. A typical stay column consists of an upper and lower support column fixed to the inner and
outer stay cones. The inner stay cone forms the inner water pas-sage and houses the turbine
parts. The outer cone forms the outside water passage surface. This cone and both support
columns are embedded in concrete, thereby trans-mitting all loads to the structure.
4-13. Types of Superstructures
The main superstructure may be one of three types: indoor, semi-outdoor, or outdoor. The indoor
type completely encloses the generators and the erection bay and has an inside crane runway
supported by the walls of the structure. The semi-outdoor type consists of a continuously reinforced
slab over generators and erection bay supported by heavy transverse walls enclosing 2 or 3 units.
The powerhouse crane is an outdoor gantry with one runway rail on each side of the low
superstructure. Sliding hatches in the roof over each generator and in the erection bay provide
access for handling equipment with the crane. In the outdoor type, each generator is protected by a
light steel housing which is removed by the outdoor gantry crane when access to the machine is
necessary for other than routine maintenance. The erection and repair space is in the substructure
and has a roof hatch for equipment access. Choice of type should be dictated by consideration of
first cost of the structure with all equipment in place, cost of maintenance of building and
equipment, and protection from the elements. The indoor type affords greatest protection from the
weather and facilitates operation and maintenance of equipment. The semi-outdoor type may
sometimes have a marginal economic advantage insofar as it pertains to the cost of the structure,
but this advantage will not always offset the increased equipment cost. The outdoor type is
structurally the most economical at sites with low maximum tailwater. The structural economy
must, how-ever, be weighed against increased cost of generator housing, greater crane costs, and
increased maintenance of equipment.
Figure 4-1. Typical cross section thru bulb unit
182 | P a g e
4-14. Superstructure - Indoor Powerhouse
a. Framing. The framing of the superstructure may be cast-in-place or precast reinforced

concrete, pre-stressed concrete, structural steel, or a combination. The choice is dependent on
economy and architectural requirements.
b. Concrete walls. Concrete exterior walls may be cast-in-place with uniform thickness, column
and spandrel wall, precast panels, or prestressed precast units. They must all be designed to
withstand the stresses from possible loading combinations and at the same time provide the
necessary space requirements, both for embedded items and interior clearances. Provisions must
usually be made for carrying loads imposed by bridge cranes and the rails are usually supported by
continuous corbels or wall offsets at the elevation of the rails. Exterior concrete should not be
rubbed nor should form liner be used, but a rigid specification for forming should be set up to insure
reasonably smooth, plane surfaces. In some cases, special finishes, such as bush hammered or
striated concrete, may be considered for special architectural effect. Matched tongue-and-groove
lumber of 2-inch nominal thickness is satisfactory for sheathing. Wall pours should not be made
more than about 10 feet in height. Horizontal rustications should be used at the pour joints on the
exterior side where practicable in order to prevent unsightly spalling; hence, locations of joints and
pour heights will depend partly on the exterior architectural treatment. In the interior of the
powerhouse where neat appearance is essential, it will be necessary to provide a smooth, dustless
surface. The requirements for obtaining such a surface are contained in EM 1110-2-2000. Sack
rubbing of the concrete surfaces should be avoided insofar as practicable. Contraction joints in the
same vertical plane as those in the substructure should be provided in the superstructure walls.
Criteria for openings in exterior walls are given in paragraph 3-1.
c. Steel framing and walls. While self-supporting concrete walls are usually preferred in the
generator and erection bays, their justification is dependent upon economy and tailwater
limitations. Where economically feasible, steel framing with curtain walls or insulated panels should
be used where the generator floor is above the maximum tailwater. The use of steel framing may,
in some cases, be desirable to permit the early installation and use of the crane runways and
crane. This advantage should, however, be evaluated only in terms of overall cost. The steel
framing for each monolith should be a separate unit, with no steel except the crane rails crossing
the contraction joints. Crane rail splices should be staggered a few inches with the joints. One bay
in each monolith should be diagonally braced in both roof and walls. Bents may be composed of
columns supporting simple beams or girders or may be rigid frames. Trusses should be used only
if dictated by unusually heavy loads and long spans. In case it will usually be advantageous to weld
shop connections and bolt field connections. Exceptions should be made for field splices in long
rigid frames, which should be welded for structural continuity.
(1) If steel framing is used in other parts of the structure, it is usually of the conventional beam
and column type used in office buildings.
183 | P a g e
(2) Suspended ceilings should be avoided unless economically justifiable. Inner tile walls to
conceal the steel columns or rigid frames should be avoided. Not only is concealment of the steel
considered unjustified but high thin walls are a hazard structurally.
d. Floors. Floors systems should be reinforced concrete flat slabs or one or two-way slabs with
a 6-inch minimum thickness. The types of floor finishes and cove details designated for the various
parts of the super-structure are given in paragraph 3-4a. Placement of concrete in floor slabs
should be stopped sufficiently below finish grade to allow for appropriate finishes. The thickness of
the structural slab will in many cases be determined by the member and size of electrical conduits
which it must encase. Separate concrete fill placed on top of the structural slabs to encase
conduits is uneconomical but can be used where large numbers of conduits must be
accommodated, or where reinforcement in the structural slab is closely spaced. If used, it is
recommended that the generator room floor be designed as a slab of uniform thickness, supported
on the upstream and downstream walls and at the generator pedestal and carried on double
columns at the contraction joints. Building contraction joints with water stops should be carried
through all floor slabs. Shrinkage and temperature steel should be provided in the tops of all slabs.
At hatchways through floors, flush sockets should be provided for the installation of temporary
railings for protection of personnel at times when the covers are removed.
Roofs. Roof framing will usually consist of pre-cast, prestressed units such as tee's, double tee's or
hollow core plank. If structural steel framing is used, it will usually be fabricated steel girders
supporting steel purlins, which in turn, support the roof deck. Slope for drainage should be provided
by the slope of the roof deck or the use of sloped insulation. The use of light-weight or sawdust
concrete should be avoided. Insulation, embedded in hot bitumen or mechanically fastened should
be applied over a vapor seal course to the roof slab or deck. Foam insulation should be avoided
due to the unevenness of application. Thickness of insulation should be determined by an analysis
of heating and cooling requirements. Roofing criteria are given in paragraph 3-2.
f. Future extensions. A temporary end wall must be provided for a superstructure which will at
some future time, be extended to house additional units. The construction of the temporary wall
should be such that it may be easily removed, and with a minimum of interference in the operation
of the station. The temporary wall below the maximum tailwater elevation should be made of
precast concrete slabs, supported on a steel framework, designed to resist the tailwater pressure,
and sealed with rubber or polyvinylchloride water seals at all joints. The remainder of the temporary
wall could be made of prefabricated metal panels which can be removed and possibly utilized in
the future permanent end wall.
g. Vibration. The superstructure in the generator monoliths will be subject to vibration caused
by the generating units. In order to minimize the effect of vibration on the main structural framing,
the superstructure should be made as rigid as practicable. Concrete columns and walls should be
integral with floor slabs and girders. Steel beams should be framed into columns and girders with
full depth connections and not with seat angles alone. In some cases, it may be desirable to use
top flange clip angles also. Special attention should be paid to framing connections in light floors,
balconies, stairways, and roofs and to fastenings of gratings, prefabricated metal panels, precast
slabs and handrails. Threaded or welded handrail connections are preferred to pin connections.
184 | P a g e
The effect of vibration in a generator monolith is, of course, greater on members close to the unit
than on those at a distance. Also, members in parts of the structure separated from the generator
monoliths by contraction joints will be less affected. Therefore, the designer must use careful
judgment in determining the extent to which vibration will influence the design of such members.
4-15. Intakes
Type of intakes. Intakes may be classified as low pressure, or high pressure, according to the head
on the inlet, but there is no definite line of demarcation separating the two types. For low-head
plants and for developments where the pool drawdown is small, low-pressure intakes are used. If
the pool drawdown is to be large, such as on many multipurpose projects, the intake will be of the
high-pressure type. It is advantageous to locate the intake high as practicable in order to minimize
weights and travel distance of gates, size of hoist, etc., as well to keep the sill above possible silt
deposits. Low-pressure intakes are usually incorporated in the dam and, for low-head plants, are
also part of the powerhouse structure. High-pressure intakes may be in the dam itself or may be in
a separate structure or structures in the forebay. The essential requirement if the two types are the
same, but the details and equipment may be radically different. Features common to practically all
intakes are: trash racks, gates, steel bulkheads, concrete stoplogs, or all three, and converging
water passage or passages.
b. Shape of intake. The lines of the intake should be carefully laid out to obtain water velocities
increasing gradually from the racks to the penstock, or to the spiral entrance. Abrupt changes in
area of the water passage should be avoided in order to minimize turbulence and consequent
power loss. The sections between the rectangular gate and the round penstock entrance is
particularly important. The transition is ordinarily made in a distance about equal to the diameter of
the penstock. Model tests are of great value in determining a satisfactory shape of intake,
especially if Juvenile Fish Bypass is a design consideration.
c. Trash racks. Trash racks are usually vertical in order to economize on length if intake
structure. For low-head intakes, however, where the increase in length of structure would be small
or where considerable trash accumulation may be expected, they are often sloped to facilitate
raking. Water velocities at the racks should be kept as low as economically practicable with a maxi-
mum, for low-pressure intakes, of about 4 feet per second. For high-pressure intakes, greater
velocities are permissible but should not exceed about 10 feet per second.
The racks are usually designed for an unbalanced head of 10 to 20 feet of water and are fabricated
by welding in sections of a size convenient for handling. For low-head intakes, stresses due to
complete stoppage and full head should be investigated and should not exceed 150 percent of
normal stresses. If the racks are to be sheathed for the purpose of unwatering the intake, case II
working stresses should not be exceeded for that loading condition. The clear distance between
rack bars varies from two to six inches or more, depending on the size and type of turbine and the
minimum operating clearances. Bar thickness should be consistent with structural design
requirements, with the vibrational effects resulting from flowing water being considered. A thick bar
should be used with the depth of the bar con-trolled by the allowable working stress.
185 | P a g e
(2) The design of the guides and centering devices for the rack sections should receive careful
attention. Clearances should be small enough to prevent offsets interfering with removal of the
racks, or operation of a rake if one is provided. Embedded members on the guide slots should
have corrosion-resisting exposed sur-faces. Corrosion-resisting clad steel is satisfactory for the
purpose.
(3) For high-pressure intakes in concrete dams, the trash rack supporting structure is
sometimes built out from the face of the dam in the form of a semicircle in order to gain rack area
to maintain low velocities.
d. Gates. Provisions for emergency closure of the intake downstream from the racks is
necessary to protect the generator unit. A vertical lift gate in each water passage is usually
provided and is normally suspended just above the roof of the intake from a fixed hoist. On very
low-head multiunit plants a single set of intake gates operated by a gantry crane is adequate and
will be less expensive than individual gates operated by fixed hoists. In either type of installation,
self-closing tractor gates capable of operating under full flow are provided. Fixed wheel gates may
be the most economical type for intakes where a gantry crane will be used for operation. Bronze-
brushed wheel bearings should be used if the wheels will be submerged when the gate is in the
stored position, otherwise, antifriction bearings can be used. For all but the lowest head intakes,
“caterpillar” type gates with corrosion-resisting steel rollers and tracks have been found to be the
most economical.
(1) In selecting the position of the gate slots, limiting velocities of flow as well as economical
gate size should be considered. If the slots are located too far downstream, where the opening is
small, power reduction from eddy losses may be more costly than a larger gate. The duration of
peak demand on the plant will also affect the location of the slots, since a higher velocity may be
tolerated for a short time. In any case, however, it is advisable to keep the maximum velocity V in
feet per second below that given by the expression:
V 0.12 2gh
in which h is the head on the center line of the gate at normal power pool.
(2) Slots for stop logs or bulkhead gates are usually provided just upstream from the gates so
the gate slots may be unwatered for maintenance operations. In case where headwater is never far
above the top of the intake, the racks are sometimes designed to support sheathing for unwatering.
(3) Essential fixed metal in the slop-log slots should have corrosion-resisting exposed
surfaces, since these slots cannot be easily unwatered for repairs.
e. Air vents. Since emergency closure must be made under full flow conditions, negative
pressures will tend to build up at the top of the intake just downstream from a downstream-sealing
gate as the gate is lowered. To prevent excessive negative pressures from occurring in the
penstock during emergency gate closure and to exhaust air during penstock filling operations, one
or more air vents should be provided just downstream from the gate. The air vents should be of
sufficient size to maintain a pressure of not less than 1/2 atmosphere in the penstock at the
186 | P a g e
maximum rate of depletion of water from the penstock under emergency closure conditions. The
opening in the intake roof should be as close as practicable to the gate. The upper end of the air
passage should be open to the atmosphere well above maximum headwater and in a location not
readily accessible to personnel. Gates sealing on the upstream side are sometimes used. Air vents
in the penstock may then be eliminated, as enough air will be introduced into the water passage
through the opening between the downstream side of the gate and the concrete structure. Gate
slots for both the upstream and downstream seal gates should be adequately vented by the use of
open grating covers or by other means.
f. Prevention of ice troubles. Periods of freezing weather are likely to cause trouble with ice at
low-pressure intakes, and the design of plants in northern latitudes should take this into account.
(1) Frazil and anchor ice may cause loss of head by forming on, or clogging rack openings, or
may immobilize racks and gates by massing in the slots. Continuous surface ice tends to prevent
the formation of frazil and anchor ice, and for this reason an ice sheet in the forebay is more
beneficial than otherwise, except as it interferes with raking, or at breakup when it must be chuted
to the tailrace or passed over the dam.
(2) Formation of ice may be prevented in the slots by means of electric heaters in casings
embedded in the piers next to the guides and on the racks by a bubbler system with outlet nozzles
just below the bottom of the racks and far enough upstream for the released air to carry the ice
particles to the surface without coming in contact with the racks. At the surface the ice is sluiced to
the tailrace.
4-16. Penstocks and Surge Tanks
a. Details and design. The determination of the diameter of penstock and the selection of size,
type, and location of surge tank, if one is used, involve rather complex economic considerations.
Therefore, only details of design will be discussed.
b. Free standing penstocks and surge tanks. The penstock should be designed for full pressure
due to static head caused by maximum elevation of the operating range for the intake pool plus
waterhammer. Waterhammer studies should be conducted to determine transient pressures at any
point along its length. The following design conditions and their corresponding allowable stresses
for carbon steels (see ASME, Boiler and Vessel Pressure Code, Sections 8 and 9 when other
steels are used) are to be considered for these structures.
(1) This condition includes maximum, minimum, and rated turbine static heads plus
waterhammer due to normal operation, load rejection and load acceptance. It also includes
stresses due to gravity loads and longitudinal stresses due to penstock movement. The allowable
stress for this basic condition is equal to the smaller of 1/4 of the specified tensile strength or 1/2 of
the specified yield strength. The load acceptance condition includes minimum static head and
loading the turbine from speed no load to full gate opening at the maximum rate of gate opening.
This condition will indicate a mini-mum pressure grade line for the determination of sub
atmospheric conditions. Amstutz buckling criteria should be used for embedded conduits. Stewart
187 | P a g e
buckling criteria should be used for non-embedded conduits. If a valve is used as an emergency
closure device, the conditions at maximum flow and maximum head with maximum valve closure
rate must be analyzed.
(2) This includes conditions during filling and drain-age of the penstock or surge tank and
seismic loads during normal operation. The allowable stress for this condition is equal to 1/3 of the
specified tensile stress or 2/3 of the specified yield point, whichever is less.
(3) This condition includes the governor cushioning stroke being inoperative and partial gate
closure in 2 L/a seconds at a maximum rate, where L equals the conduit length in feet and a equals
the pressure wave velocity in feet per second. The allowable stress for this condition is equal to 1/2
of the specified tensile strength, but in no case shall this stress exceed the specified minimum yield
stress.
(a) After combining longitudinal and circumferential stresses in accordance with the Hencky-
Mises Theory, where Se² = Sx²+SxSy+Sy², the allowable stresses are not to be exceeded by the
resulting equivalent stress at any point on the penstock or surge tank.
(b) Minimum shell thicknesses are recommended for all steel penstocks to provide the rigidity
needed during fabrication and handling. This minimum may be computed from the formula T = D +
20/400, where D equals the diameter in inches and T equals the minimum shell thickness in
inches. A thinner shell may, in some cases, be used if proper stiffeners are provided during
fabrication, handling, and installation.
(c) Welded joints should be butt-welds made under strict procedure control by qualified
operators, and in accordance with the provisions of CW-05550, welded power penstock and surge
tanks. All longitudinal seams should be examined radiographically in accordance with CW-05550.
(d) Completed penstocks with an operating head greater than 100 feet, should be
hydrostatically tested with an internal pressure that will produce a hoop stress of 1.5 times the
allowable stress. Penstocks with operating heads less than 100 feet should be pressure tested if
they are unusually long, as may be the case of power tunnels or some conduits. Care should be
taken when specifying test pressures to indicate where on the pen-stock the pressure is to be
measured. This will ensure that the penstock is not overstressed during the test. If the entire
penstock cannot be tested as a unit, individual sections are to be tested in the shop after they have
been radiographed. The pressure should be applied three times, being increased and decreased
slowly at the uniform rate. The test pressure should be held for a length of time sufficient for the
inspection of all plates, joints, and connections for leaks or signs of distress. It is desirable that the
test be performed when the pipe and water have a temperature of not less than 60 °F. The
penstock should be vented at high points during filling to prevent formation of air pockets.
(e) Upon completion, and prior to insulation and painting, surge tanks should be tested by
filling the tank with water to a point 1 foot from the top of the shell and maintaining this water level
for not less than 24 hours, or such additional time as may be required to inspect all plates, joints,
and connections for leaks or signs of dis-tress. Preferred water and shell temperatures for the test
should be not less than 60 °F.
188 | P a g e
(f) In long penstocks, a surge tank may be necessary to prevent the fluctuation of
waterhammer flow from seriously interfering with turbine regulation (see 4-16(f)). Free-standing
penstocks should be constructed so as to permit any leakage to drain to tailwater without
pressurizing the surrounding regulating outlet conduit. Careful attention should be given to
anchorage of the penstock against longitudinal thrust.
c. Power conduit linings. The function and many of the details of construction and erection for
an integrally embedded steel liner are similar to a free-standing penstock; however, the loading
conditions are different. The steel lining, concrete encasement, and if present, the surrounding rock
act together to resist the pressures. EM 1110-2-2901 outlines in detail the loading conditions and
allowable stresses for a conduit under embankments or rock. In both instances, external pressures
must be accounted for as well as the internal pressures.
d. Water velocities and water hammer. The velocity of flow in penstocks depends largely upon
turbine regulations but is seldom lower than 6 feet per second. In very high-head plants velocities
as high as 30 feet per second have been used. For medium-head plants at maximum discharge,
velocities of about 12 to 18 feet per second are typical. It should be noted that the allowable
stresses for the components of the turbine spiral case, spiral case extension, valve, and valve
extensions are different than those for the penstock. Refer to the guide specifications (CE-2201.01,
CE-2201.02, and CE-2201.03, etc.) for these allowable stresses. The point of division between the
penstock and spiral case/valve extension is customarily defined as the limit of supply for the turbine
and/or valve manufacturer.
Changes in the rate of flow in penstocks cause variations in pressure known as water hammer.
These changes in flow rate can be caused by the turbine wicket gate motions due to power
changes or load rejections, unit runaway, and closure of the emergency valve or gate. The
magnitude of the pressure variation is dependent upon the length of penstock, the velocity of the
water, and the rate of change of the flow. When the turbine gates close due to a decrease in load,
the pressure increases above the steady full load gradient. As the gate movement ceases, the
gradient drops below that for steady full load, then fluctuates with diminishing amplitude between
the maximum and minimum positions until the movement is damped out by friction. When an
increase in load causes the turbine gates to open, the gradient first drops below that for steady full
load, then fluctuates in a manner similar to that described for gate closure. The penstock must be
designed at every point to withstand both the maximum and minimum pressure at that point as
determined by the highest and lowest position of the water-hammer pressure gradient.
(2) The subject of water hammer is covered in Hydroelectric Handbook by Creager and Justin,
Hand-book of Applied Hydraulics by Davis, Engineering Fluid Mechanics by Jaeger, and
Waterhammer Analysis by John Parmakian. Prior to development of plans and specifications, the
hydraulic system should be modeled using a digital computer to simulate the various design
conditions and configurations of the hydroelectric facility. The Corps has had a computer program
(WHAMO) especially developed to simulate water hammer and mass oscillation in hydro-power
and pumping facilities. This program or one equal to it should be used for this purpose. The
Hydroelectric Design Center should be consulted prior to usage of WHAMO.
189 | P a g e
e. Bends, wyes, and tees. The distance from an elbow or bend in a penstock to the turbine
inlet should be as great as the layout will permit in order that disturbances in the flow at the bend
will not affect turbine performance. If a butterfly valve is used, its center line should be at least 3
penstock diameters upstream from the center line of the unit. The penstock must be anchored at
bends to withstand the centrifugal forces of the water as it changes direction. Anchorages are
usually blocks of mass concrete encasing the pipe. Wyes and tees involve internal pressures on
noncircular sections and require special design. Often the entire wye branch or tee is encased in
reinforced concrete, sometimes with embedded steel girders and tie rods, to prevent deformation
and concentration of stresses in the shell. An example is the tee at a surge tank riser. Stress
analysis of wyes and tees can be done as outlined in “Design of Wye Branches for Steel Pipe”
published in the June 1955 edition of Journal of The American Water Works Association. For large
structures or unusual configuration, a finite element analysis may be necessary.
f. Surge tanks and stability. For isochronous (isolated from the power grid) operation, a
minimum ratio of water-starting time to mechanical starting time is required for stability. Usage of a
surge tank (which decreases water starting time) or a flywheel (increases mechanical starting time)
may be employed. Surge tanks also moderate water-hammer pressures. In long penstocks the
fluctuation of water-hammer pressure may seriously interfere with turbine regulation unless relief is
provided. For this purpose, a surge tank is generally used at the lower end of a penstock longer
than about 400 feet. For simple surge tanks, the minimum area is usually 50 per-cent larger than
the Thoma area. Isochronous operation capability should be provided for all but the smallest units.
Surge tanks are of three basic types: simple, restricted-orifices, and differential. Also for
underground stations where the rock is suitable, a surge chamber (accumulator) can be employed.
A discussion of the advantages and disadvantages of each type as well as an outline of design
procedures is contained in Chapter 35 of Hydroelectric Handbook by Creager and Justin.
Waterhammer Analysis by Parmakian also covers solutions of simple surge tanks. The WHAMO
program is also capable of modeling all types of surge tanks as well as predicting hydraulic
instability. It is recommended that the Hydroelectric Design Center or an engineer who has a
successful record in surge tank design be retained to analyze the flow regulation problem and
design the tank at any power project where long penstocks are to be used and isochronous unit
operation is a requirement.
4-17. Switchyard Structures
The most suitable and economical general arrangement and design of outdoor high-voltage
switchyards should be based on consideration of the scheme of high-voltage switching employed,
the voltage and capacity of the main buses and transmission lines, the number of generator or
transformer and transmission line bays required, the location of the main power transformers, the
direction of transmission lines leaving the yard, and size and topography of the space available.
a. The switchyard should be arranged to provide adequate space for the safe movement of
maintenance equipment and for the future movement of circuit breakers and other major
equipment into position without de-energizing existing buses and equipment. A chain link woven
wire fence approximately 7 feet with lockable gates should be provided to enclose the entire
switchyard.
190 | P a g e
b. An arrangement using high truss-type structures and either strain or rigid-type buses
required a minimum of ground area and is generally used for yards rated 161 kV and below. An
arrangement using low flat-type structures with rigid buses is generally used for yards 230 kV and
above and may also be used for lower-voltage yards where adequate space is available. This
design utilizes separate A-frame structures for dead-ending the transmission lines and individual
lightweight structures for supporting the buses, disconnects and other equipment. This
arrangement is considered the most reliable and all equipment is easily accessible for inspection
and maintenance.
c. The switchyard structures and transmission line take-off towers have special requirements
in regard to loading, rigidity, resistance to shock, installation, and maintenance. Standards for the
design of switchyard structures to meet these special requirements have been developed on the
basis of long experience of the power industry and are summarized in NEMA Publication SG 67,
“Power Switching Equipment.”
d. The switchyard structures should be designed for the initial power installation but with
provision for expansion as additional generating units and transmission lines are installed in the
future.
4-18. Reinforcing Steel
Reinforcement should be designed using the requirements set forth in the latest edition of ACI 318
“Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete,” and as amended by EM 1110-2-2104
“Strength Design for Reinforced Concrete Hydraulic Structures.” Guide specification CW-03210
“Steel Bars, Welded Wire Fabric and Accessories for Concrete Reinforcement” provides the
necessary details for tests, cutting, bending, and splicing of reinforcement.
4-19. Encasement of Structural Steel
When the framing of the powerhouse is structural steel, the members shall not be encased, except
for certain locations where appearance is a factor, such as office space and lobby, or where a fire
hazard exists.
4-20. Retaining Walls
Walls subject to earth pressure, such as tailrace walls and foundation walls at the shore end of the
powerhouse, may be of the gravity, semi-gravity or cantilever type, depending upon economy, and
should be founded on solid rock wherever possible. Where sound rocks rises above the bottom of
the tailrace at the shore side, excavation may be saved by anchoring a concrete facing to the rock
and building the gravity wall above.
4-21. Area Drainage
Roof drains should be provided with basket-type strainers and should be connected to interior
leaders discharging into the headwater or the tailrace. All floors should have flush drains to carry
191 | P a g e
wash water, seepage, and possible leakage from tanks to the station sump or, if the area drained is
well above maximum tailwater, to the tailrace.
a. Angles and abrupt bends in drain lines should be avoided insofar as possible, and cleanouts
should be provided where necessary to facilitate clearing the pipes.
b. Floors should be sloped so that drains are well removed from electrical equipment, and
particular attention should be paid to all details to avoid damage to such equipment caused by
leaks or clogged drains.
c. In cold climates drain piping must be located where temperatures will not drop below
freezing or must be properly insulated. Outlets should be well below tailwater to prevent formation
of ice at the discharge.
4-22. Chamfers, Grooves, and Rustications
Exterior square corners are undesirable in concrete construction because of their tendency to
break removal of forms or as a result of weathering or impact. Chamfers are usually formed on all
exposed corners, but particular attention should be paid to this detail on the exterior walls.
Chamfers of ample size should be provided at the ends of monoliths, forming V-grooves at the
contraction joints. Horizontal V-grooves, or rustications are some-times used for architectural
reasons and lift heights should then be planned so that the rustication will occur at the horizontal
joints.
Chapter 5
Physical Security
5-1. Protection Plan
For every hydropower installation a detailed, written protection plan shall be developed, which will
use avail-able resources in the most efficient manner. Although the primary area of concern should
be protection from terrorist threats, all aspects of protection design should be addressed. (A
recommended source of advice is the Missouri River Division (MRD), the Corps' Technical Center
of Expertise for Protection Design.)
a. Type of protection. In determining the type and extent of physical protection required at an
installation, the following pertinent factors should be taken into consideration in the indicated
sequence.
(1) Importance of the power supply to National Security, to the regional power base, and
project operational requirements.
(2) Definition and analysis of area to be protected, and other pertinent consideration inherent
to the problem such as existing hazards, either natural or man-made. (Threats from the stored
water in the reservoir, from landslide or avalanche, from forest or brush fire, etc.)
192 | P a g e
(3) Operation, maintenance, and other requirements which must be integrated into the security
plan.
(4) Environment-political, economic, legal, surrounding terrain, weather and climate.
(5) Costs of material and equipment to be installed, as well as availability of funds to provide at
least minimum protection for all critical areas.
(6) Feasibility, personnel and equipment costs, and the best method of providing adequate
cost-effective protection.
b. Architectural design. The architectural design of the structure should incorporate necessary
security design features.
(1) A minimum of windows, particularly near ground level.
(2) Well anchored steel doors and frames.
(3) Transformers and power transmission lines located, or protected, to discourage threat
activities.
c. Key elements in developing the protection plan. The response analysis should be assessed.
The critical item to be estimated is the response time for security forces (project guards, local law
enforcement agents, etc.) to reach the installation once they are alerted. The powerhouse operator
should not be considered a part of the security forces. Once the response time is estimated, then a
threat analysis should be performed. This would consider the most probable route of intruders to
the most vulnerable areas of the hydropower installation. Then various delay zones (fences, walls,
etc.) should be considered, each with its own intrusion detection system. The threat analysis
should result in a series of delay zones so that the total time for the intruders to reach critical area
of the hydropower installations, from first detection, exceeds the response time by security forces.
Chapter 6
Retrofitting Existing Projects
6-1. General
The addition of hydropower facilities at the existing Corps of Engineers projects must not
jeopardize the public interest relative to water control management for flood control, navigation,
water supply, water quality, recreation and other project proposes. In addition, those aspects of the
design that could affect the safety of the project must be consistent with Corps standards as to
requirements of this manual and all referenced manuals and regulations. To ensure compliance
with this policy when development is by non-federal licenses, the Corps of Engineers will review
and approve the proposed detailed design analysis and plans and specifications for those
hydraulic, structural and mechanical features that could affect the integrity and safety of the total
project. Major items of concern, but not necessarily limited to, are discussed as follows:
193 | P a g e
6-2. Hydraulic Design Considerations
a. Proposals. Proposals to add hydropower facilities at Corps of Engineers projects must

thoroughly address the hydraulic design details and the overall functional capability. Items that
must be addressed include the following.
(1) Streamlining of entrance to power penstock from flood control conduit must be addressed.
(2) Streamlining to preclude cavitation in flood control conduit at junctions with penstock or
gate slots must be addressed.
(3) Positive and negative pressure surges due to powerhouse load rejections, load
acceptance, and unit runaway is another important item to address.
(4) Reassessment of water quality provisions to include size and location of multi-level intakes
and compatibility of powerhouse release requirements with water quality requirements is an
important item.
Means of dewatering power facilities without interrupting water quality and/or flood control releases
must be addressed. However, some powerhouses with long penstocks, or those with only gates or
valves immediately upstream of the powerplant need not be dewatered except under emergency
conditions. This procedure can be followed only if it does not impact upon dam safety of flood
control regulations. This type of penstock can be inspected using divers or remotely operated
cameras.
(6) Effects of adding trashracks in the existing intake if required for equipment protection must
be addressed.
b. Submittals. Submittals proposing inclusion or addition of hydropower combined with water

quality and or flood control facilities at Corps of Engineers projects must include a hydraulic design
analysis covering all operating and emergency conditions. Presentations need to address all items
discussed above. Information on energy and pressure grade lines throughout the hydraulic
passages covering maximum and minimum conditions with local pressure drops at such places as
bends, junctions, transitions, gate slots, etc., is necessary. The presentations must include an
analysis of the effects of a powerhouse load rejection. The degree of detail is to be sufficient for the
study stage being presented, although at final design stage. a transient analysis utilizing state-of-
the-art computer programs must be performed and reviewed by a Design Center. The
requirements apply to proposals from others (to be accomplished at their expense) as well as to in-
house proposals.
c. Penstocks. The existing regulating outlet conduits offer an available connection between the
reservoir and potential hydropower facilities. Regulating outlet conduits ar flood control or other
non-power projects are usually designed for non-pressurized (open channel) flow conditions. for
the most part, these conduits are of rein-forced concrete designed to withstand external rock or
embankment loads and external hydrostatic pressures. Once hydropower facility is connected, the
primary structural concern is that an existing regulating outlet conduit becomes a power penstock
194 | P a g e
subject to internal pressures equal to full pool plus any transient pressures due to water manner
effects. Submittals proposing inclusion or addition of facilities at Corps of Engineers projects must
include structural and geotechnical analysis covering all operating and emergency conditions.
Presentations need to address all items covered in this guidance. The degree of detail presented
should be sufficient for the study stage being presented. This applies to proposals from others (to
be accomplished at their expense) as well as to in-house proposals. The following paragraphs
present acceptable design criteria for converting regulating outlet conduits to power penstock
(downstream control).
6-3. Geotechnical Considerations
Original geologic conditions upon which project design was based, and upon which cut and cover
or lines or unlined tunnels were constructed, must be known so that safety and original design
benefits are not reduced. Water must not be allowed to escape into the dam abutments from
pressurized tunnels to cause slope stability problems or groundwater changes that might affect the
dam. An investigation of geologic conditions relative to the design proposed for a pressurized
tunnel must be made. Existing lined tunnels may conceal voids, shear zones, rock of low
deformation modulus, etc. When modifying existing lined tunnels, design shall recognize and
provide for the above possibilities, just as it would for unlined tunnels containing geologic
weaknesses. Full length grouting behind linings or other measures may be necessary. If an
existing tunnel is acting as a drainage feature in an abutment, intentionally or unintentionally, the
possibility of groundwater pressure changes occurring after modification should be evaluated. The
function and many of the details of construction and erection for an integrally embedded steel liner
are similar to a free-standing penstock; however, the loading conditions are different. The steel
lining, concrete encasement, and if present, the surrounding rock act together to resist the
pressures. EM 1110-2-2901 outlines in detail the loading conditions and allowable stresses for a
conduit under embankments or rock. In both instances, external pressures must be accounted fro
as well as the internal pressures.
6-4. Tunnels in Rock Abutments
An existing outlet tunnel (unlined or lined with other than steel) should be investigated to determine
to what extent the tunnel should be lined with steel plate to prevent leakage that could present a
danger to the dam or abutment. The extent of steel liner plate should be sufficient to prevent
leakage along rock fissures or joints that intercept the dam or downstream of the impervious zone.
An existing tunnel liner must be investigated for internal pressures that will occur once the
hydropower facility is installed. In regions of an existing regulating outlet tunnel liner where the rock
cover is insufficient to offset internal pressures, or where geologic weaknesses exist, a new liner
may be required fro structural reasons. A steel linerplate could be grouted in place and designed
as composite with an existing concrete liner, provided the existing liner reinforcement is adequate
for all loads (see EM 1110-2-2901). If the tunnel is unlined of if the existing liner reinforcement is
inadequate, a separate free-standing penstock or new reinforced concrete liner with composite
steel liner plate should be provided.
195 | P a g e
6-5. Cut and Cover Conduits
a. General. In its existing non-pressurized condition, these conduits are generally reinforced
concrete structures without steel plate liners. To prevent leakage that would endanger the
embankment dam, a steel lining is required from the upstream face of the impervious zone to the
powerhouse. A reinforced concrete liner composite steel liner plate, or a free-standing penstock,
may be required to structurally accommodate the internal full pool pressures resulting from
downstream control plus additional pressures due to water hammer effects.
b. Circular conduits. A steel liner grouted to be integral with the existing concrete liner may be
used provided the requirements of EM 1110-2-2901 are met. If the existing concrete reinforcement
does not meet the above requirements, a free-standing type penstock or new reinforced concrete
liner with composite steel liner plate should be provided.
c. Non-circular conduits. A free-standing penstock, erected within and independent of the

existing regulating outlet conduit, should be provided.
6-6. Free-Standing Penstocks Within Conduits
Free-standing penstocks constructed within an existing conduit shall be designed in accordance

with par-graph 4-16, penstocks and surge tanks. Plates and joints should be designed for full
pressure due to static head plus water hammer as well as any negative pressures developed by
hydraulic transients. All joints should be welded except for the connection of the penstock to the
spiral case, which is normally a flexible type. Free-standing penstocks should be constructed so as
to permit any leakage to drain to tailwater without pressurizing the surrounding regulating outlet
conduit. Careful attention should be given to anchorage of the penstock against longitudinal thrust.
a. Gates and valves. The addition of hydropower facilities must include provisions for isolating
the power plant so as not to interfere with the project original purpose. When the existing flood
control conduit is modified for penstock use, a closure device such as a butterfly or spherical valve
or a gate must be provided at the powerhouse end of the penstock for shutoff of flow during
emergency closure or during normal maintenance of the equipment.
(1) The closure device should be designed for maximum penstock head including water
hammer and hydrostatically tested for 150 percent of the maximum design conditions. The valve
operator must be capable of closing the device in from 2 to 5 minutes as practical for its size. The
closure capability must be achievable without outside power. Thus, an energy storage device such
as an accumulator or counterweight is required.
(2) The closure of the normal water passage at the downstream end for diverting flow to the
turbine is subject to the specific project layout. Gates or valves used for this purpose must be
designed for the maximum water pressure, including water hammer, and subject to hydrostatic
testing in place.
Vents. When the existing flood control facilities are utilized for hydropower purposes, all the
existing components require careful analyzing and investigation for any adverse cavitation or
196 | P a g e
structural effects. One such item subject to structural loading greater than originally thorough
analysis of the effects such changes would have on the system when used in the original operation
mode for the project purpose. During powerhouse operation the vents are subject to full hydrostatic
pressure including water hammer, and therefore structural adequacy should be thoroughly
investigated for this condition as well as the seismic condition.
c. Bifurcation. In most instances, the utilization of the existing regulating conduit requires
diverting the water flow from the conduit to the power producing facilities. The method of
accomplishing this objective requires a bifurcation or diverting box depending of the specific site
conditions. The method chosen must be thoroughly analyzed for potential cavitation or structural
effects and may require model testing to verify the design. For further structural requirements, see
paragraph 4-16e.
197 | P a g e
CHAPTER 5
FINAL DESIGN
The designers final design shall be located in the third proposed location at Caagutayan,
San Teodoro, Oriental Mindoro and is nearby Mt. Halcon. The table below shows the computed
data from chapter 3, sub-section 3.4.3.

Variables Values
16 hours (Average)
Operational Hours
8 hours (Peak)
Head of Water 191 m

Variables Values
Length (LP) 198.159485 m

198 | P a g e

Variables Values


Variables Values

These are the theoretical specifications of different components of the hydroelectric power
plant. These data will be served as a basis for determining the actual specifications from
standards. The standards must be equal or greater than the theoretical specifications in order to be
correctly designed and not to be over-designed which can lead to higher cost.
199 | P a g e
5.1 Actual Specifications
The values generated and calculated from Chapter 3 shall be converted into actual values
which will be based on standards. Some values generated shall be rounded-off to nearest
hundredths for easy dimensioning.
5.1.1 Penstock Actual Specifications

Variables Values
Length (LP) 199 m
Angle of Inclination (ϴ) 75˚
Thickness of Penstock (tp) 11

(C1020 Steel Sheet Gauge 8) in = 0.171875 in
64
5.1.2 Surge Tank Actual Specifications

Variables Values
Volume of Surge Tank (VST) 33 m³

1
Thickness of Surge Tank (tST) in = 0.0625 in
16
(C1020 Steel Sheet Gauge 16)
1
Thickness at Bottom (TBST) in=0.05 in
20
(C1020 Steel Sheet Gauge 18)
200 | P a g e
5.1.3 Water Dam Actual Specifications

Variables Values
201 | P a g e
5.2 Component Catalogues
5.2.1 Hydroelectric Turbine
The turbine that the final design will use is a francis turbine. This type of turbine has been
chosen from the following figure.
Figure 5-1: Working Areas of Different Turbine Types

(Source: Based on NHA and HRF, 2010)
The power output of the final design is 43 MW and the net head is equal to 191 m. From
these data, the designers can point out the needed type of turbine by using the last figure. From
the graph, the point was in the area of pelton and francis turbine. The designers choose francis
turbine because it is the most widely used type of turbine and has the widest range of application.
The catalogue for the francis turbine is shown in the succeeding figure.
202 | P a g e
Figure 5-2: GE Francis Turbine Catalogue
5.2.2 Penstock
The penstock shall be fabricated with a specification stated at Chapter 5.1.2 (Penstock
Actual Specification). The designed material is C1020 Steel gauge 8 (normalized).
Figure 5-3: Standard Gauge for Sheet and Plate Iron and Steel
(Source: https://www.tedpella.com/company_html/gauge.htm)
203 | P a g e
5.2.3 Surge Tank
The surge tank shall be fabricated with a specification stated at Chapter 5.1.3 (Surge Tank
Actual Specifications). The designed material is C1020 Steel gauge 18 (annealed).
Figure 5-4: Standard Gauge for Sheet and Plate Iron and Steel
(Source: https://www.tedpella.com/company_html/gauge.htm)
204 | P a g e
5.2.4 Sluice Gate
The sluice gate controls the flow of water from the dam to the powerhouse. The chosen
sluice gate shall have a diameter the same as the actual diameter of the designed penstock which
is 0.75 m or 750 mm.
205 | P a g e
206 | P a g e
207 | P a g e
208 | P a g e
5.2.5 Hydroelectric Generator
Hydroelectric generator must be able to produce the designed output of 43 MW which is

equivalent to 43,000 kVA depending on the power factor of the equipment.
209 | P a g e
210 | P a g e
211 | P a g e
212 | P a g e
213 | P a g e
214 | P a g e
215 | P a g e
216 | P a g e
217 | P a g e
218 | P a g e
219 | P a g e
5.2.6 Transformer
The transformer for the designed hydroelectric power plant should be capable of handling
of at least 43 MVA of electricity.
220 | P a g e
221 | P a g e
222 | P a g e
223 | P a g e
224 | P a g e
225 | P a g e
226 | P a g e
227 | P a g e
5.3 Conclusion
The design of hydroelectric power plant is very crucial in terms of location. The design
must be based on location variables, e.g. shaded area. From the computation, trade-offs and
sensitivity analysis, the third proposed location ranked first. The third proposed location is located
in Caagutayan, San Teodoro, Oriental Mindoro and has a coordinate 13˚ 19’ 60’’ North, 121˚ 00’ 0’’
East. The net head of dam is 191 m. The net head is based on the volume of the collected water
from the shaded area and the time of operation for average and peak demand. From the
computation, the theoretical specifications of each component have been solved. The theoretical
specifications shall be used as a basis for selecting the actual specifications of each component.
The actual specifications should be the near higher value from the theoretical specifications for
allowance.
The designers also calculated the approximate total cost of construction. The cost is
subjected to change and it shall serve as a guide only for planning of expenditures and allocation
of resources.
Overall, to design a hydroelectric power plant, one must take into account the variables
needed. These are the location, the operational time, and the cost needed. Additionally, the cost
must take into account the different expenditures. By knowing this, the designers can choose which
of the designs are economical and viable.
5.4 Recommendation
After completing this design, the designers formulate recommendations that will take the
designing into new level. Here is the list of recommendations,
More rigorous approximation and analysis of cost. By rigorous computation of estimated cost,
the design shall be more accurate and favorable to the client. This will serve as a basis for
accurate planning and allocation of resources.
Designers should survey the actual area of location. This will remove any uncertainties in the
design and to assume accurately the needed values for the design of the whole power plant.
Actual surveying and assessment of the power demand of the area. This will accurately
determine the demand of local residents. Additionally, this will determine the accurate power
shortages if there are power shortages and this will serve as basis for designing a power plant.
Validation of design using software simulation applications. By using simulation applications,

the design can be validated more accurately and this, also, can locate the flaws in the design.
Simulation applications will greatly help the designers if the designs are correct can be
administered to real-time applications.
228 | P a g e
229 References
REFERENCES
American Society of Civil Engineers. (1990). Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other
Structures. In ASCE, American Society of Civil Engineers (pp. 7-88). New York: American
Society of Civil Engineers.
Ancieta, C. A. (2009). Estimating E7M Powerhouse Costs. International Water Power and Dam
Construction.
ASEAN Centre for Energy. (2016, November). Levelised Cost of electricity of Selected Renewable
Technologies in the ASEAN Member States. Jakarta, Indonesia: ASEAB Centre of Energy.
Bratley, J. (2017, October 16). clean energy ideas. Retrieved from clean eergy ideas website:
https://www.clean-energy-ideas.com/hydro/hydropower/advantages-and-disadvantages-of-
hydroelectric-power
Buecker, B. (2007, June 1). Power Engineering. Retrieved from Power Engineering Website:
https://www.power-eng.com/articles/print/volume-111/issue-6/features/steam-generator-
efficiency.html
Byrne, J. P. (1999). Project management: how much is enough? PM Network.
Caterpillar Cashman Power Solutions. (n.d.). Generator Power Factor. Retrieved from Cashman
Equipment: https://www.cashmanequipment.com/cashmancat/media/Cashman-
Equipment/generator-power-factor.pdf
Davis, C. (1952). Handbook of Applied Hydraulics Second edition. New York: McGraw-Hill Book
Co., New York.
Energy Storage Association. (2018). Energy Storage Association. Retrieved from Energy Storage
Association Website: http://energystorage.org/energy-storage/technologies/pumped-
hydroelectric-storage
Faires, V. M. (1969). Design of Machine Elements. New York: McMillan Publishing Company, Inc.
Free Map Tools. (2015, June 17). Free Map Tools. Retrieved from Free Map Tools Website:
https://www.freemaptools.com/area-calculator.htm
Gilbert Gedeon, P. (1995). Planning and Design of Hydro-Electric Power Plants. New York City:
CED Engineering.
Hydro Electric Power Plants. (n.d.). In Power Plant technology (pp. 389-487).
In the Matter of the Application for the Approval of the Addendum and Second Addendum to the
Electricity Supply Agreement (ESA) Between Oriental Mindoro Electric Cooperative, Inc.
(ORMECO) and Power One Corporation (Power One), 2014-003 RC (January 13, 2014).
229 | P a g e
230 References
In the Matter of the Application for the Approval of the Batangas-Mindoro Interconnection Project
(NMIP), with Prayer for the Issuance of a Provisional Authority, 2011-108 RC (Energ
Regulatory Commision August 23, 2011).
International Finance Corporation. (n.d.). Hydroelectric Power: A Guide for Developers and
Investors. Stuttgart: International Finance Corporation.
IRENA. (2012). Hydropower. Renewable Energy Technologies: Cost Analysis Series.
Jaeger, C. (1949). Engineering Fluid Mechanics. London: Blackie & Son, Ltd.
Justin, W. C. (1950). Hydroelectric Handbook Second Edition. New York: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
Klanfar, M., Korman, T., & Kujundzic, T. (2014). Fuel Consumption and Engine Load factors of
Equipment in Quarrying of Crushed Stone. Zagreb: University of Zagreb.
Majumder, M., & Ghosh, S. (2013). Chapter 2: Hydropower Plants. Decision Making Algorithms for
Hydro-Power Plant Location, 15-19.
Meralco. (2017). Peak/Off-Peak. Retrieved from Meralco POP Website:

https://corporatepartners.meralco.com.ph/products-services-and-programs/peak-peak-
program
Miles Yanick and Company. (1972). Visitors Facilities, Guideline & Criteria Corps of Engineers.
Miles Yanick and Company, North Pacific Division.
Morse, F. T. (1953). Power Plant Engineering. Virginia: Litton Education Publishing, Inc.
Parmakian, J. (1955). Waterhammer Analysis. Prentiss Hall, New York: J. Parmakian.
Prescribing New Minimum Wage Rates in MIMAROPA Region, RB-MIMAROPA-08 (Regional

Tripartite Wages and Productivity Board MIMAROPA Region November 28, 2017).
Ted Pella, Inc. (2018). Standard Gauge for Sheet and Plante Iron and Steel. Retrieved from Ted
Pella, Inc. Website: https://www.tedpella.com/company_html/gauge.htm
Valencia, H. G. (n.d.). Oriental Mindoro Power Development Program. Orminvest.
Westergaard, H. M. (1933). Water Pressures on Dams during Earthquakes. In A. S. Engineers,

American Society of Civil Engineers, Transactions (pp. 18-472). American Society of Civil
Engineers.
230 | P a g e
231 Appendices
APPENDICES
1. Hydropower Installation Cost
2. Hydropower Key Findings by ASEAN Centre for Energy
231 | P a g e
232 Appendices
3. Working Areas of Different Turbine Types
232 | P a g e
233 Appendices
4. Estimation of Project Development Cost
233 | P a g e
234 Appendices
5. Data on Fuel Consumption and Calculated Load factors
6. New Minimum Wage Rate in MIMAROPA
234 | P a g e
235 Appendices
7. Suggested Formula in Determining the Equivalent Monthly Regional Minimum Wage Rates
235 | P a g e
236 Appendices
8. Cost Estimation for Powerhouse Equipment
236 | P a g e
237 Appendices
237 | P a g e
238 Appendices
9. Estimated Project Management Cost
10. Price of Cement per bag
238 | P a g e
239 Appendices
11. Price of Sand and Gravel per cubic meter
12. Price of Reinforced Steel Bars
239 | P a g e
240 Appendices
13. Typical Power Factor of Generator
240 | P a g e
241 Appendices
14. Peak and Off-Peak Hours
15. Factors of Safety (Design Factors) (From Design of Machine Elements by V. M. Faires, page
20)
Table 5-8: Factors of Safety

CAST IRON,
STEEL,
BRITTLE TIMBER
DUCTILE METALS
METALS
KIND OF LOAD
Based on Based on
Based on Ultimate
Ultimate Yield
Strength
Strength Strength
Dead load, N= 3–4 1.5 – 2 5–6 7
Repeated, one direction,

6 3 7–8 10
gradual (mild shock),* N =
Repeated, reversed,
8 4 10 – 12 15
gradual (mild shock),* N =
Shock, * N = 10 – 15 5–7 15 – 20 20
241 | P a g e
242 Appendices
16. Typical Properties of Wrought Ferrous Metals (From Design of Machine Elements by V. M.
Faires, page 576)
242 | P a g e
243 Curriculum Vitae
CURRICULUM VITAE
243 | P a g e
DU, EDCHELLE DM.

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Technological Institute of the Philippines (TIP) QC
Address: Blk37 Lot70E Carnation St. Grand Valley Phase 3

Angono, Rizal
Email Address: edchelledu@gmail.com
Cellular No.: +63955-933-9259
OBJECTIVE
To have a career in Mechanical Engineering, which is stable and continuous in learning, where I can
exercise the knowledge that I have acquired from my BS Mechanical Engineering program and its courses
at the Technological Institute of the Philippines QC, and to contribute to the company and to work within its
values, and to contribute to the society and the environment as a new generation engineer.
QUALIFICATION AND SKILLS

• Computer literate
• Can work well under pressure
• Trainable and willing to learn new things
• Quick and Eager Learner
• Responsible, efficient and flexible
• Polite, respectful and courteous manner
• Bilingual English/Tagalog
• Familiar with Word, Excel, AutoCAD, and Solid Works
• Can draw
• Knows how to drive and has a driving license
SEMINAR/S AND TRAINING/S ATTENDED

• Kawasaki Motors Philippines, Rouser 200NS technical and maintenance seminar
May 28, 2016
Kawasaki Motors Philippines, Cupang, Muntinlupa
• Pacific Hub, Jollibee ( BPO ) account training
March-April 2015
11th Floor Pacific Hub Training Room, Robinsons Equitable Tower, Ortigas Center, Pasig City
PERSONAL INFORMATION
• Date of Birth: May 3, 1995
• Place of Birth: Sta. Cruz, Manila
• Religion: Roman Catholic
• Citizenship: Filipino
• Civil Status: Single
.
REFERENCES
• Quirico Soriano Jr. • Lester Codog
ADJ Realty FoilaCar Industries
Marketing Manager CEO/Owner/President
+63922-817-0975 +63917-593-1679
244 | P a g e
PETER JOHN F. FORTEZ

Address: 6 Lecias St. Malanday, Marikina City
Email Address: fortezpeterjohn21@gmail.com
Cellular No.: +639156437311
CAREER OBJECTIVE
To establish a career in Mechanical Engineering where I can demonstrate the learning outcomes from the
Mechanical Engineering program of the Technological Institute of the Philippines (TIP), a program accredited by
the US-based outcomes-oriented ABET (Accreditation Board for Engineering and Technology). To learn new
things, to broaden my knowledge in Mechanical Engineering, to apply the theories that I learned into hands-on, to
solve problems in real-life situation and to open a door for challenges and opportunities for self-improvement.
DESIGN PROJECTS COMPLETED/ RESEARCHES
Walking Robot Machine Elements 1 - Technological Institute of the Philippines

Giant Abanico Machine Elements 2 - Technological Institute of the Philippines
Power Transmission Design Machine Design 2 – Technological Institute of the Philippines
KNOWLEDGE, SKILLS AND ATTITUDE
Having graduated from TIP with its orientation towards outcome-based education, I have acquired and can
demonstrate the following student acquire outcomes (knowledge, skills and attitudes) necessary to the practice
of the computing profession:
Analyze complex problems and identify and define the computing requirements appropriate for solution.
Use modern techniques and tools of the computing practice in complex activities.
Understand professional, ethical, legal, security and social issues and responsibilities relevant to
professional computing.
Able to work under pressure and to think positive regardless of the situation.
Good intrapersonal skills.
SEMINARS AND TRAININGS ATTENDED
• SPARK A CHANGE: Celebrate Women’s Day

Gateway Cineplex 10 Cinema 5, Gateway Mall, Araneta Center (March 2014)
• Autodesk Fusion 360 workshop
De LaSalle Zobel (2016)
• “MECHANICAL ENGINEERING – As a tool for learning”
Technological Institute of the Philippines (August 8, 2016)
• PSME TIP QC SU Seminar
Technological Institute of the Philippines (August 8, 2016)
245 | P a g e
EXTRA AND CO-CURRICULAR ENGAGEMENTS AND VOLUNTEER WORKS
Philippine Society of Mechanical Engineers (Academe Chapter)

Member
Jul 11, 2016 - Present
ACE-Q
Member
Jul 15, 2013 - Jul 11, 2016
Humanities and Social Sciences Society

Member
Jul 14, 2014 - Jul 13, 2015
Philippine Society of Mechanical Engineers TIP-QC Student Unit

Member
Jul 15, 2016 – Present
OTHER SKILLS
Proficient in editing photos and making posters using Photoshop

Proficient in Microsoft Office applications (Microsoft Word, Powerpoint, Excel)
Playing musical instruments (piano, bass guitar, lead guitar, drums)
Proficient in 3D software application (SolidWorks)
REFERENCES
Engr. Christen Peralta Christian Peña Engr. Dennis John Mamon

Mechanical Engineering Department Staff nurse Mechanical Engineering Department
Instructor Marikina St. Vincent General Instructor
Technological Institute of the Hospital Technological Institute of the
Philippines Quezon City chinchanpena@yahoo.com Philippines Quezon City
tentenpdacs@yahoo.com 09955284509 dennisjohnmamon@gmail.com
09159382939 09173539747
246 | P a g e
BORIS LORENZO LIMPAHAN

Address: 1356 2nd St. Chason Southville, Brgy. dela Paz,
Pasig City, Metro Manila
Email Address: borisqtpt112@gmail.com
Cellular No.: +639268428438
CAREER OBJECTIVE
Giant Abaniko
A big fan that is hand-operated. It is made up of PVC pipes as foundation of the body and bamboo as the
skeleton of the fan. It has springs that opens and closes the fan by pulling a cord.
Walking Mechanism
It is a Theo Jansen mechanism that is made up of popsicle sticks and is driven by hand.
Design of Carbon Recycler or Air Filtration System for the Collection of Carbon for Places with High Air Pollutants
This research aims to design an air filtration system that will clean air as well as to collect the carbon in the air.
ACADEMIC PERFORMANCE IN SOLID MENSURATION OF MALE AND FEMALE 1ST YEAR ME STUDENTS
IN TIP QC: A COMPARATIVE STUDY
This research is about the significant difference between the academic performance of 1st year male and female
student in Solid Mensuration. Also, this research provides recommendations and the causes of low academic
performance in Solid Mensuration.
ISANG PAGHAHAMBING SA PAGITAN NG PAGGAMIT NG DIESEL ENGINE AT GASOLINE ENGINE NG

MGA MEKANIKO SA LUNGSOD NG ANTIPOLO, RIZAL
This research in Filipino provides thorough studies about the difference of gasoline and diesel engine in the
perspective of Mechanics
247 | P a g e
3rd Luzon Regional PSME Student Conference

Development Academy of the Philippines, Tagaytay City, Cavite
Jul 16, 2016
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING - As a tool for learning

Technological Institute of the Philippines, Cubao, Quezon City
Aug 08, 2016
ASCENDANCE 2017 - Igniting the Fuel for Engineering Evolution

Conference Hall, Integrated Research and Training Center, TUP-Manila
Jan 25, 2017
HANDS-ON TECHNOLOGY FOR MACHINE ELEMENTS

Sep 11, 2015
6th PSME National Student Conference

SMX Convention Center Manila, Mall of Asia Complex, Pasay City
Oct 05, 2016

Member
ACE-Q
Member
Jul 15, 2013 - Jul 11, 2016

Member
Jul 14, 2014 - Jul 13, 2015

Member
OTHER SKILLS

Proficient in Microsoft Office applications (Microsoft Word, Powerpoint, Excel)
Playing musical instruments (flute, piano)
Proficient in 3D software application (SolidWorks)
248 | P a g e
REFERENCES
Engr. Christen Peralta Christian Peña Engr. Dennis John Mamon

Mechanical Engineering Department Staff nurse Mechanical Engineering Department
Instructor Marikina St. Vincent General Instructor
Technological Institute of the Hospital Technological Institute of the
Philippines Quezon City chinchanpena@yahoo.com Philippines Quezon City
09159382939 09173539747
249 | P a g e
DAVID MARTIN J. MAXIMO

Address: Blk. 8 Lot 7 Gamboaville Brgy. Dalig, Antipolo City
Email Address: maximodavidmartin1996@gmail.com
Cellular No.: +639353928127
CAREER OBJECTIVE
Giant Abaniko
A big fan that is hand-operated. It is made up of woods and joints. The fan opens with the use of the concept of
hydraulics. And it operates by rotating a pulley.
Walking Mechanism
It is a Theo Jansen mechanism that is made up of popsicle sticks and is driven by hand.
Power Transmission Design

It is a design requirement for our subject Machine Design 2
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING - As a tool for learning

Aug 08, 2016
6th PSME National Student Conference

SMX Convention Center Manila, Mall of Asia Complex, Pasay City
Oct 05, 2016
250 | P a g e
Mechanical Engineering Society NAVICON (September 2017)
2nd PSME Mechanical Engineering Research Conference PMERC (October 2017)
MESH NSNU Seminar October 2017

Member
ACE-Q
Member
Jul 15, 2013 - Jul 11, 2016

Member
Jul 14, 2014 - Jul 13, 2015

Member
Jul 15, 2016 – Present
TIP Voice (School Publication)

Illustrator
2016 - 2018
OTHER SKILLS

Proficient in Microsoft Office applications (Microsoft Word, Powerpoint)
Playing musical instruments (guitar,piano,violin)
Proficient in 3D software application (SolidWorks, Autocad, Sketchup)
REFERENCES
Engr. Christen Peralta Melanie Soriano Engr. Dennis John Mamon

Mechanical Engineering Department HR Staff Mechanical Engineering Department
Instructor ISOC Holdings Inc. Instructor
Technological Institute of the Ortigas Center, Quezon City Technological Institute of the
Philippines Quezon City mfsoriano2@up.edu.com Philippines Quezon City
09159382939 09173539747
251 | P a g e
JAIGE CHRISTIAN D. MUÑOZ

Address: 7321 Ramirez st. Gordon Heights, Olongapo City
Email Address: jaojaomunoz@gmail.com
Cellular No.: +639263620381
CAREER OBJECTIVE
To establish a career in mechanical engineering where I can demonstrate the learning outcomes of the
Mechanical Engineering program of the Technological Institute of the Philippines (TIP), a program accredited
by the US-based outcomes-oriented ABET (Accreditation Board for Engineering and Technology), Computing
Accreditation Commission.
KNOWLDEGE, SKILLS AND ATTITUDE
• Communication Skills
• Critical Thinking and Problem-Solving Skills
• Willing to be trained
• Adaptability/Flexibility/Managing Multiple Priorities
• Fast learner
• Can multi task and work under pressure
• MECHANICAL ENGINEERING - As a tool for learning

Technological Institute of the Philippines, Quezon City
Aug 08, 2016
• 6th PSME NATIONAL STUDENT CONFERENCE
SMX Convention Center, Manila
Oct 05, 2016
EXTRA AND CO-CURRICULAR ENGAGEMENT AND VOLUNTEER WORK
• PHILIPPINES SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS - Academe Chapter

Member
Aug 08, 2015 – Present
• RUN FOR THE ILOG PASIG
Volunteer National Training Service Program – TIP QC
April 20, 2013
• SALUTATORIAN
St. Anne Academy
April 6, 2013
REFERENCE
Available upon request.
252 | P a g e
253 Rubrics
RUBRICS
253 | P a g e
254 Rubrics
254 | P a g e
255 Rubrics
255 | P a g e
256 Rubrics
256 | P a g e
257 Rubrics
257 | P a g e

Design of 43 MW Hydroelectric Power Plant in Oriental Mindoro

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Design of 43 MW Hydroelectric Power Plant in Oriental Mindoro

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

TECHNOLOGICAL INSTITUTE OF THE PHILIPPINES

938 Aurora Blvd., Cubao, Quezon City

College of Engineering and Architecture

DESIGN OF 43 MW HYDRO-ELECTRIC POWER PLANT

This Design is presented to the Mechanical Engineering Department

POWER PLANT DESIGN

Engr. Rodrigo M. Garcia, PME

This design entitled Design of 43 MW Hydro-Electric Power Plant in Oriental Mindoro,

ENGR. RODRIGO M. GARCIA, PME

Approved by the committee on oral examination on March 2018

Engr. Dennis John Mamon Engr. Luisito B. Tolentino

ENGR. MANUEL E. MENDOZA, PME

DR. JESUSA N. PADILLA

This project design is hereby proofread.

MS. MARIZ F. DACULA

APPROVAL SHEET ............................................................................................................................ii

The conceptualization of this design project entitled, “Design of 43 MW Hydroelectric

Thank you and God bless.

1.1 The Project

Additionally, from the document, ORMECO’s energy demand as of 2013 is 188,318,000

ORMECO forecast an energy demand which is based on an average minimal increase in

2018 𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑎𝑠𝑡 𝐴𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝐸𝑛𝑒𝑟𝑔𝑦 𝐷𝑒𝑚𝑎𝑛𝑑 = 22 𝑀𝑊 (1 + 𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒)𝑛

Substituting this value to the equation,

2018 𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑎𝑠𝑡 𝐴𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝐸𝑛𝑒𝑟𝑔𝑦 𝐷𝑒𝑚𝑎𝑛𝑑 = 22 𝑀𝑊 (1 + 0.04)5

2018 𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑎𝑠𝑡 𝐴𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝐸𝑛𝑒𝑟𝑔𝑦 𝐷𝑒𝑚𝑎𝑛𝑑 = 26.8 𝑀𝑊 ≈ 27 𝑀𝑊

Determining the expected peak demand for the year 2018,

2018 𝐸𝑥𝑝𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑃𝑒𝑎𝑘 𝐷𝑒𝑚𝑎𝑛𝑑 = 35 𝑀𝑊 (1 + 0.04)5

2018 𝐸𝑥𝑝𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑃𝑒𝑎𝑘 𝐷𝑒𝑚𝑎𝑛𝑑 = 42.6 𝑀𝑊 ≈ 43 𝑀𝑊

1.2 Statement of the Problem

1.3 Project Objectives

1.3.1 General Objectives

To propose a design of hydro-electric power plant with a rated capacity of 43 MW of power

The specific objectives of this project are as follows:

1.4 The Client

Figure 1-2: ORMECO Official Logo

Figure 1-3: ORMECO Profile

Figure 1-4: ORMECO Technical Information

Figure 1-5: ORMECO Rates for Residential Customer as of November 2014

1.5 Project Scope and Limitations

The power plant design encompasses the following:

The limitations of the power plant design are the following:

1.6 Project Development

• DESIGN GATHERING AND INPUTS

• FINAL DESIGN OF HYDROELECTRIC POWER PLANT

Design Gathering and Inputs

Simultaneously, the designers proposed a reservoir-type hydroelectric power plant for

2.1 Proposed Power Generating Plant: Hydroelectric Power Plant

In North America, hydropower plants were installed at Grand Rapids, Michigan

2.1.3 Classification of Hydroelectric Power Plant

Hydroelectric power plants can be classified according to:

1. Capacity of Water Flow Regulation

2.1.3.1 Capacity of Water Flow Regulation

a. Run-off River Plants without Pondage

Figure 2-1(a): Typical Layout of Run-off River Plant

Figure 2-1(b): Chief Joseph Dam near Bridgeport, Washington, USA

b. Run-off River Plant with Pondage

Figure 2-3(a): Reservoir Hydroelectric Power Plant

Figure 2-3(b): Adam Beck Hydroelectric Generating Stations

d. Pumped Storage Plant

Figure 2-4: Principle of a Pumped Storage Power Plant

2.1.3.2 Classification of Hydroelectric Power Plant According to Availability of Water Head

Table 2-1: Classification of Hydroelectric Power Plant based on Available Head

Types of Plant Head